®

Boxster, Boxster S
Owner’s Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 WKD 987 021 10 5/09 Orientation guides in the
© Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG
Owner’s Manual
Porsche, the Porsche crest, Boxster, PCCB, PCM, The orientation guides in the Owner’s Manual are
PDK, PSM and Tequipment are registered trade- highlighted in yellow.
marks and the distinctive shapes of Porsche auto-
mobiles are trademarks of Overall Table of Contents
Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG. At the start of the Owner’s Manual you will find an
All rights reserved. overview of the overall contents of the Owner’s
Manual.
Printed in Germany
Section Contents
There is a summary of topics with the corre-
sponding page numbers at the beginning of each
main chapter.

Index
There is a detailed, alphabetical index at the end
of this Owner’s Manual.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dear Owner, A separate Maintenance Booklet explains how Warning!
you can keep your Porsche in top driving condition
Any alteration or misuse of the vehicle can
We would like to thank you for your purchase of a by having it serviced regularly.
lead to accidents and severe or fatal
Porsche Sports car. A separate Warranty and Customer Informa-
personal injuries.
tion Booklet contains detailed information about
Judging by the car you have chosen, you are a mo- Any alteration of the vehicle may negate or
the warranties covering your Porsche.
torist of a special breed, and you are probably no interfere with those safety features built into
novice when it comes to automobiles. the vehicle. Modifications may be carried out
For U.S. only:
on your vehicle only if approved by Porsche.
Remember however, as with any vehicle, you If you believe that your vehicle has a fault which Your Porsche is intended to be used in a safe
should take time to familiarize yourself with your could cause a crash, injury or death, you should manner obeying the local laws and in the
Porsche and its performance characteristics. Al- immediately inform the National Highway Traffic light of driving conditions faced by you, and
ways drive within your own unique capabilities as Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti- in accordance with the instructions provided
a driver and your level of experience with your fying Porsche Cars North America, Inc. (Porsche in this Owner’s Manual.
Porsche. Ensure that anyone else driving your Cars N.A.).
Porsche does the same. To prevent or minimize in- f Do not misuse your Porsche by ignoring those
jury, always use your safety belts. Never consume If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open laws and driving conditions, or by ignoring the
alcohol or drugs before or during the operation of an investigation, and if it finds that a safety prob- instructions in this manual.
your vehicle. lem exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a re-
call and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can-
This Owner’s Manual contains a host of useful in- not become involved in individual problems be- Caution!
formation. Please take the time to read this manu- tween you and your dealer, or Porsche Cars N.A..
al before you drive your new Porsche. Become fa- The fitting of racing tires (e.g. slicks) for
miliar with the operation of your Porsche car for To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety sporting events is not approved by Porsche.
maximum safety and operating pleasure. The bet- Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800- Very high cornering speeds can be achieved
ter you know your Porsche, the more pleasure you 424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or with racing tires. However, the resulting
will experience driving your new car. write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh transverse acceleration values would jeopar-
Always keep your Owner’s Manual in the car, and Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. dize the adequate supply of oil to the engine.
give it to the new owner if you ever sell your You can also obtain other information about motor Porsche therefore will not accept any
Porsche. vehicle safety from http://www.savercar.gov. warranty or accept any liability for damage
occurring as a result of non-compliance with
Your car has thousands of parts and components this provision.
which have been designed and manufactured in
accordance with Porsche’s high standards of f Do not fit racing tires (e.g. slicks) for sporting
engineering quality and safety. events on your vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Regularly check your vehicle for signs of Warning! Note to owners
damage.
For your own protection and longer service life of
Damaged or missing aerodynamic compo- In Canada, this manual is also available in French.
your car, please follow all operating instructions
nents such as spoilers or underside panels To obtain a copy contact your dealer or write to:
and special warnings. These special warnings use
affect the driving behavior and therefore
the safety alert symbol, followed by the words
must be replaced immediately. Note aux proprietaires
Danger, Warning and Caution. These special
Your car may have all or some of the components warnings contain important messages regarding
described in this manual. your safety and/or the potential for damage to Au Canada on peut se procurer un exemplaire de
Should you have difficulty understanding any of your Porsche. Ignoring them could result in seri- ce Manuel en français auprès du concessionaire
the explanations of features or equipment installed ous mechanical failure, serious personal injury or ou du:
in your vehicle, contact your authorized Porsche death. Porsche Cars Canada, Ltd.
dealer. He/She will be glad to assist you. Also Automobiles Porsche Canada, LTEE
check with your dealer on other available options f Do not alter your Porsche. Any alteration could
or equipment. create dangerous conditions or defeat safety 5925 Airport Road
engineering features built into your car. Suite 420
Throughout this booklet, left is designated as the
driver’s side of the vehicle, and right as the pas- f Do not misuse your Porsche. Use it safely, and Mississauga, Ontario
senger’s side of the vehicle. consistently with the law, according to the driv- Canada L4V 1W1
ing conditions, and the instructions in this man- Telephone number for customer assistance:
Text, illustrations and specifications in this manual
ual. 1-800-PORSCHE / Option 3
are based on the information available at the time
of printing. Alteration or misuse of your Porsche could
It has always been Porsche’s policy to continuous- cause accidents and serious personal injury
ly improve its products. Porsche, therefore, re- or death.
serves the right to make changes in design and
specification, and to make additions or improve-
ments in its product without incurring any obliga-
tion to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
We wish you many miles of safe and pleasurable
driving in your Porsche.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake Setting and operating vehicle Portable Fuel Containers
(PCCB) components when driving
Danger!
f Please see the chapter “BRAKES” on Page 56.
Warning! Portable fuel containers may leak, whether
The high-performance brake system is designed they are full or partially empty. Fuel leaking
There is a danger of accident if you set or op-
for optimal braking effect at all speeds and from a portable container carried in your ve-
erate the on-board computer, radio, naviga-
temperatures. hicle could, in case of an accident, cause a
tion system, telephone or other equipment
Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient fire or explosion, resulting in serious person-
when driving.
conditions (such as temperature and humidity) al injury or death.
This could distract you from the traffic and
therefore might cause brake noises.
cause you to lose control of the vehicle re- f Never carry additional fuel in portable contain-
Wear on the different components and braking sulting in serious personal injury or death. ers in your vehicle.
system, such as brake pads and brake discs,
f Operate the components while driving only if
depends to a great extent on the individual driving
style and the conditions of use and therefore
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely. Ground Clearance
cannot be expressed in actual miles on the road. f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
procedures only with the vehicle stationary. Caution!
The values communicated by Porsche are based
Risk of damage. The vehicle may touch the
on normal operation adapted to traffic. Wear
ground as a result of reduced ground clear-
increases considerably when the vehicle is driven
ance.
on race tracks or through an aggressive driving
style. f Drive carefully and slowly on steep slopes (e.g.
parking lots, curbs, uneven roads, lifting plat-
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer
forms etc.).
about the current guidelines in effect before
such use of your vehicle. f Avoid steep ramps.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Exhaust Hot Exhaust Pipes

Danger! Warning!

Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled. Risk of burn injury when standing near or
Engine exhaust fumes have many compo- coming into contact with the exhaust pipe.
nents which you can smell. They also contain The exhaust pipe is hot when the vehicle is running
carbon monoxide (CO), which is a colorless and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is
and odorless gas. turned off.
Carbon monoxide can cause unconscious-
ness and even death if inhaled. f To prevent injury, make a point of noting where
your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing
f Never start or let the engine run in an en- your legs near the exhaust pipe, and closely
closed, unventilated area. supervise children around the vehicle when the
It is not recommended to sit in your car for pro- exhaust pipe could be hot.
longed periods with the engine on and the car A hot exhaust pipe can cause serious burns.
not moving.

California Proposition 65 Warning

Warning!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and cer-
tain vehicle components contain or emit chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table of Contents
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB) ...... 4 Sun Visors ...................................................41 Cupholder ................................................... 86
Setting and operating vehicle components Safety Belts .................................................42 Ashtray ....................................................... 87
when driving .................................................. 4 Airbag Systems ...........................................44 Cigarette Lighter ......................................... 88
Portable Fuel Containers ................................ 4 Child Restraint Systems ................................50 Storage in the Passenger Compartment ........ 89
Ground Clearance .......................................... 4 LATCH System Luggage Storage on Engine Compartment Lid 91
Engine Exhaust .............................................. 5 Child seat bracket on the passenger’s seat ....54 Luggage Compartment Lids ......................... 92
Sports Exhaust System ................................55 Luggage Compartment ................................ 94
Before driving off................................. 8 Parking Brake ..............................................55 Rear luggage compartment .......................... 94
Brakes .......................................................56 Trunk Entrapment ....................................... 95
Before driving off... ........................................ 8 ABS Brake System (Antilock Brake System) ...59 Porsche Communication Management (PCM) . 97
Break in hints for the first Clutch Pedal ................................................60 Car Telephone and Aftermarket Alarms ........ 99
2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers ...................... 10 Sport Mode .................................................61 iPod, USB and AUX .................................... 100
Porsche Stability Management (PSM) .............63 Fire Extinguisher ....................................... 101
Operation, Safety............................... 13 Porsche Active Suspension Management HomeLink ................................................. 102
Keys .......................................................... 15 (PASM) ........................................................66
Security Wheel Bolts .................................... 15 Retractable Spoiler ..................................... 67 Automatic Air Conditioning System,
Doors ......................................................... 18 Fixed rear spoiler .........................................68 Heated Rear Window/
Central Locking in Cars without Alarm System 19 Interior lights ...............................................69
Parking Aids ...............................................70
Door Mirror Heating......................... 105
Central Locking in Cars with Alarm System ... 21
Alarm System, Ignition/Starter Switch with Air Conditioning ......................................... 106
Passenger Compartment Monitoring ............. 25 anti-theft Steering Lock .................................72 Automatic Air Conditioning System ............. 109
Power Windows ........................................... 27 Starting Procedures .....................................75 Central and Side Vents ............................. 112
Mirrors ........................................................ 29 Stopping Engine ..........................................76 Fresh-air Intake ........................................ 112
Rear Window Defogger, Door Mirror Heating .. 31 Emergency Flasher Switch ............................77 Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating ... 113
Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints ............ 32 Light Switch on Vehicles
Seat Memory ............................................... 35 with Bi-Xenon Headlights ...............................78 Instruments, On-Board Computer,
Heated Seats .............................................. 37 Light Switch on Vehicles Warnings ........................................ 115
Seat Ventilation ............................................ 38 with Halogen Headlights ...............................80
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........................... 38 Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer /Parking light / Instrument Panel USA Models ..................... 116
Steering Wheel Heating ................................ 39 Flasher Lever ...............................................81 Instrument Panel Canada Models ................ 118
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel ..................... 40 Windshield Wiper/ Washer Lever ...................82 Automatic Speed Control Indicator light ...... 120
Automatic Speed Control ..............................84 Instrument Illumination ............................... 120

6 Table of Contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Trip Odometer ........................................... 121 Engine Oil Level ........................................199 Bulb chart ................................................. 257
Speedometer ............................................ 122 Engine Oil Recommendation ........................200 Lights, Replacing Bulbs ............................. 257
Changing over between Miles / Kilometers .. 122 Brake Fluid Level ........................................202 Headlights ................................................ 258
Tachometer ............................................... 123 Fuel Economy ............................................204 Number Plate Light .................................... 266
Turn Signal Indicator Light .......................... 123 Operating your Porsche in other Countries ...204 Changing Light-Emitting Diodes and Long-Life
High Beam Indicator Light ........................... 123 Fuel Recommendations ..............................206 Bulbs ....................................................... 266
Gear Shift Indicator Portable Fuel Containers ............................207 Adjusting Headlights .................................. 267
(in vehicles with manual transmission) .......... 123 Fuel Evaporation Control ............................207 Towing ..................................................... 269
Cooling System .........................................124 Emission Control System ............................208
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ................... 125 How Emission Control Works ......................209 Vehicle Identification,
Fuel .......................................................... 126 Washer Fluid ..............................................210 Technical Data ................................ 273
Clock ........................................................ 127 Power Steering ..........................................211
Outside Temperature ................................. 127 Air Filter ....................................................211 Vehicle Identification .................................. 274
Check Engine (Emission Control) ................. 129 Combination Filter ......................................211 Technical Data .......................................... 276
On-Board Computer (BC) ............................ 130 Fluids/Oils for Manual Transmission Tire Pressure for Cold Tires ....................... 277
Warnings on the instrument panel and the on- and Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) .............211 Tires, Rims, Tracks .................................. 278
board computer .........................................162 Wiper Blades ............................................212 Driving Performance* ............................... 280
Car Care Instructions ................................213 Capacities ................................................ 281
Shifting Gears.................................. 171 Weights ................................................... 282
Practical Tips, Emergency Service.... 221 Dimensions .............................................. 282
Manual Transmission, Clutch ....................... 172 Diagrams ................................................. 283
Drive-Off Assistant ..................................... 173 Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ................... 174 on your Vehicle .........................................222
Tires/Wheels ............................................ 223
Mobile Roofs ................................... 181 Loading Information ...................................234
Wheel Bolts ..............................................236
Convertible Top .........................................182 Changing a wheel .......................................237
Windstop ................................................... 189 Flat Tire..................................................... 239
Hardtop .................................................... 190 Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting Platform
or Garage Lift ............................................242
Maintenance, Car Care .................... 195 Spacers ....................................................243
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working Electrical System ......................................245
on your Vehicle .......................................... 196 Battery .....................................................249
Coolant Level ............................................ 197 Replacing the remote-control battery ..........254
Engine Oil ................................................. 199 Emergency Starting with Jumper Cables ......255

Table of Contents 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dear Porsche Owner Before driving off... f If a child will be riding in the vehicle, check
child seat/child seat restraint system to ensure
A lot has gone into the manufacture of your that restraints are properly adjusted.
Porsche, including advanced engineering, rigid Check the following items first
f Child restraint systems will not fit into the
quality control and demanding inspections.
f Turn the engine off before you attempt any Sports bucket seat.
These engineering and safety features will be
checks or repairs on the vehicle. Do not install a child restraint system in the
enhanced by you...
Sports bucket seat.
f Be sure the tires are inflated correctly.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be equipped
the safe driver... Check tires for damage and tire wear.
with the LATCH system and thus the airbag
f See that wheel bolts are properly tightened system cannot be manually deactivated.
– who knows his/her car and all controls, and not loose or missing.
f Check all exterior and interior lights for opera-
– who maintains the vehicle properly, f Check engine oil level, add if necessary. tion and that the lenses are clean.
Make it a habit to have engine oil checked with
– who uses driving skills wisely and always f Check the headlights for proper aim, and if
drives within her/his own capabilities and the every fuel filling.
necessary, have them adjusted.
level of familiarity with the vehicle. f Check all fluid levels such as windshield
f Check under the vehicle for leaks.
You will find helpful hints in this manual on how to washer and brake fluid levels.
f Be sure all luggage is stowed securely.
perform most of the checks listed on the following f Be sure the vehicle battery is well charged and
pages. cranks the engine properly.
If in doubt, have these checks performed by your Emergency equipment
authorized Porsche dealer. f Check all doors and lids for proper operation
and latch them properly. It is good practice to carry emergency equipment
f Check, and if necessary replace worn or in your vehicle.
cracked wiper blades. Some of the items you should have are:
window scraper, snow brush, container or bag of
f See that all windows are clear and unob- sand or salt, emergency light, small shovel, first-
structed. aid kit, etc.
f Check air intake slots and area between lug-
gage compartment lid and windshield. Ensure
that these areas are free of snow and ice, so
the heater and the windshield wipers work
properly.

8 Before driving off...

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 In the driver’s seat... On the road... f When parked, always set the parking brake.
Move the PDK selector lever to ”P“ or the gear-
f Check operation of the horn. f Never drive after you have consumed alcohol shift lever to reverse or first gear.
or drugs. On hills also turn the front wheels toward the
f Position seat for easy reach of foot pedals and
curb.
controls. f Always have your safety belt fastened.
To reduce the possibility of injury from the f When emergency repairs become necessary,
f Always drive defensively.
airbag deployment, you should always sit back move the vehicle well off the road. Turn on the
Expect the unexpected.
as far from the steering wheel as is practical, emergency flasher and use other warning de-
while still maintaining full vehicle control. f Use signals to indicate turns and lane changes. vices to alert other motorists. Do not park or
operate the vehicle in areas where the hot ex-
f Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors. f Turn on headlights at dusk or when the driving
haust system may come in contact with dry
conditions warrant it.
f Buckle your safety belts. grass, brush, fuel spill or other flammable ma-
f Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in terial.
f Check operation of the foot and parking brake.
front of you, depending on traffic, road and
f Make it a habit to have the engine oil checked
f Check all warning and indicator lights with weather conditions.
with every refueling.
ignition on and engine not running.
f Reduce speed at night and during inclement
f Start engine and check all warning displays for weather.
warning symbols. Driving in wet weather requires caution and re-
duced speeds, particularly on roads with
f Never leave an idling car unattended.
standing water, as the handling characteristics
f Lock doors from inside, especially with chil- of the vehicle may be impaired due to hydro-
dren in the car to prevent inadvertent opening planing of the tires.
of doors from inside or outside.
f Always observe speed limits and obey road
Drive with doors locked.
signs and traffic laws.
f When tired, get well off the road, stop and take
a rest. Turn the engine off. Do not sit in the ve-
hicle with engine idling.
Please see the chapter “ENGINE EXHAUST” on
Page 5.

Before driving off... 9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Break in hints for the first f Do not participate in motor racing events, Engine oil and fuel consumption
sports driving schools, etc. during the first
2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers 2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers. During the break-in period oil and fuel consump-
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining opti- tion may be higher than normal.
There may be a slight stiffness in the steering,
mum performance from your new Porsche. gear-shifting or other controls during the break-in As always, the rate of oil consumption depends on
Despite the most modern, high-precision manufac- period which will gradually disappear. the quality and viscosity of oil, the speed at which
turing methods, the moving parts must still wear the engine is operated, the climate and road con-
in with each other. This wearing-in occurs mainly in Break in brake pads and brake discs ditions, as well as the amount of dilution and oxi-
the first 2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers. dation of the lubricant.
New brake pads and discs have to be “broken in”, f Make a habit of checking engine oil with every
and therefore only attain optimal friction when the
Therefore: refueling, add if necessary.
car has covered several hundred miles or km.
f Preferably take longer trips. The slightly reduced braking ability must be com-
pensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder.
f Avoid frequent cold starts with short-distance This also applies whenever the brake pads and
driving whenever possible. brake discs are replaced.
f Avoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops.
f Do not exceed maximum engine speed of
New tires
4,200 rpm (revolutions per minute).
New tires do not have maximum traction. They
f Do not run a cold engine at high rpm either in tend to be slippery.
f Break in new tires by driving at moderate
Neutral or in gear.
f Do not let the engine labor, especially when speeds during the first 60 to 120 miles/100 to
driving uphill. Shift to the next lower gear in 200 km. Longer braking distances must be an-
time (use the most favorable rpm range). ticipated.
f Never lug the engine in high gear at low
speeds. This rule applies at all times, not just
during the break-in period.

10 Before driving off...

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1 Inner door handle, Page 18
2 Power windows, Page 27
3 Door mirror control, Page 29
4 Hands-free microphone
5 Seat memory, Page 35
6 Diagnostic socket (OBD)
7 Front and rear lid release, Page 92
8 Steering-wheel adjustment, Page 38
9 Seat adjustment, Page 32

Before driving off... 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1 Light switch, Page 78, 80
2 Ignition/starter switch, Page 72
3 Turn signal/headlight dimmer,
flasher lever, Page 81
4 Lever for on-board computer, Page 130
5 Horn
6 Lever for automatic speed control, Page 84
7 Wiper/washer lever, Page 82
8 Stopwatch, Page 140
9 Interior temperature sensor
10 Emergency flasher switch, Page 77
11 Central locking button, Page 20, 23
12 Cupholder, Page 86
13 Seat heating/ventilation left/right,
Page 37, 38
14 Operating panel for air conditioning, Page 106
15 Sport/Sport Plus program, Page 61
Retactable spoiler, Page 67
Porsche Active Suspension Management
(PASM), Page 66
Porsche Stability Management
(PSM), Page 63
Sports exhaust system, Page 55
16 Operating panel for Porsche Communication
Management (PCM), see separate operating
instructions

12 Before driving off...

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation, Safety
Keys .......................................................... 15 Retractable Spoiler ..................................... 67
Security Wheel Bolts .................................... 15 Fixed rear spoiler .........................................68
Doors ......................................................... 18 Interior lights ...............................................69
Central Locking in Cars without Alarm System 19 Parking Aids ...............................................70
Central Locking in Cars with Alarm System ... 21 Ignition/Starter Switch with
Alarm System, anti-theft Steering Lock ................................72
Passenger Compartment Monitoring ............. 25 Starting Procedures .....................................75
Power Windows ........................................... 27 Stopping Engine .........................................76
Mirrors ........................................................ 29 Emergency Flasher Switch ............................77
Rear Window Defogger, Door Mirror Heating .. 31 Light Switch on Vehicles
Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints ............ 32 with Bi-Xenon Headlights ...............................78
Seat Memory ............................................... 35 Light Switch on Vehicles
Heated Seats .............................................. 37 with Halogen Headlights ...............................80
Seat Ventilation ............................................ 38 Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer /Parking light /
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........................... 38 Flasher Lever ...............................................81
Steering Wheel Heating ................................ 39 Windshield Wiper/ Washer Lever ...................82
Multi-Functional Steering Wheel ..................... 40 Automatic Speed Control ..............................84
Sun Visors ................................................... 41 Cupholder ...................................................86
Safety Belts ................................................. 42 Ashtray .......................................................87
Airbag Systems ........................................... 44 Cigarette Lighter ..........................................88
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 50 Storage in the Passenger Compartment ........89
LATCH System Luggage Storage on Engine Compartment Lid 91
Child seat bracket on the passenger’s seat .... 54 Luggage Compartment Lids ..........................92
Sports Exhaust System ................................ 55 Luggage Compartment ................................94
Parking Brake .............................................. 55 Rear luggage compartment ..........................94
Brakes ....................................................... 56 Trunk Entrapment .......................................95
ABS Brake System (Antilock Brake System) ... 59 Porsche Communication Management (PCM) ..97
Clutch Pedal ................................................ 60 Car Telephone and Aftermarket Alarms .........99
Sport Mode ................................................. 61 iPod, USB and AUX ....................................100
Porsche Stability Management (PSM) ............. 63 Fire Extinguisher ........................................101
Porsche Active Suspension Management HomeLink ..................................................102
(PASM) ........................................................ 66

Operation, Safety 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Never invite car theft! Warning! To protect your vehicle and your possessions
from theft, you should always proceed as
Risk of a serious accident.
An unlocked car with the key in the ignition lock follows when leaving your vehicle:
The steering column will lock when you re-
invites car theft.
move the key while you are driving or as the f Close windows.
A steering wheel lock and a gong alarm are car is rolling to a stop. You will not be able to
f Close convertible top (with the convertible top
standard equipment in your Porsche. steer the car.
open, the passenger compartment monitoring
The gong alarm will sound if you open the driver’s Serious personal injury or death could result
system is always switched off)
door while the key is still in the ignition lock. It is from loss of control of the vehicle.
your reminder to pull the key out of the ignition f Remove ignition key.
f Never remove the key from the steering lock
lock and to lock the doors.
while you are driving. f Engage steering lock.

Warning! f Lock glove compartment.

Any uncontrolled movement of the vehicle f Remove valuables (e.g. car documents, cell
may result in property damage, serious per- phones, house keys) from the car.
sonal injury or death. f Lock doors.
Never leave your vehicle unattended with the
key in the ignition lock, especially if children
and/or pets are left unattended in the vehi-
cle. They can operate power windows and
other controls. If the engine is left running,
they may accidentally engage the shift lever.
Serious personal injury or death could result
from loss of control of the vehicle.
f Always remove the ignition key.
f Always set the parking brake.
f Lock the doors with the remote control.

14 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Keys Replacement keys Immobilizer
f Please see the chapter “ALARM SYSTEM, PAS- Replacement car keys can be obtained only from There is a transponder (an electronic component)
SENGER COMPARTMENT MONITORING” on your authorized Porsche dealer, and this can in the key grip, containing a stored code.
Page 25. sometimes be very time-consuming. When the ignition is switched on, the ignition lock
You should therefore always keep a spare key on checks the code.
f Please see the chapter “CENTRAL LOCKING IN
your person. The immobilizer can be deactivated and the en-
CARS WITHOUT ALARM SYSTEM” on Page 19.
Keep it in a safe place (e.g. wallet), but under no gine started only using an authorized ignition key.
f Please see the chapter “CENTRAL LOCKING IN circumstances in or on the vehicle.
CARS WITH ALARM SYSTEM” on Page 21. Switching off the immobilizer
The key codes of new keys have to be “reported”
Two car keys are supplied with your Porsche. to the car control unit by your authorized Porsche f Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock.
These keys operate all the locks on your vehicle. dealer. If the ignition is left on for more than 2 minutes
f Be careful with your car keys: do not part with A total of 6 car keys can be reported to the control without the engine being started, the immobilizer
them except under exceptional circumstances. unit. is switched on again.

f To avoid battery run-down, always remove the f If this happens, turn the ignition key back to
Disabling key codes
ignition key from the ignition lock. position 3 (ignition off) before starting the
If a key is lost, the key codes can be disabled by engine. The immobilizer is switched off again,
an authorized Porsche dealer. and the engine can be started.
Emergency operation All the remaining car keys are required for this pur-
f Please see the chapter “IGNITION/STARTER
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY OPERA- pose.
SWITCH WITH ANTI-THEFT STEERING LOCK”
TION – PULLING OUT THE IGNITION KEY” on Disabling the code ensures that the car can be
on Page 72.
Page 74. started only using authorized keys.
Switching on the immobilizer
Note
f Remove ignition key.
f Please note that the other locks can still be
opened with the disabled key.
Security Wheel Bolts
f If wheels have to be removed during a work-
shop visit, do not forget to hand over the sock-
et for the security wheel bolts along with the
car key.

Operation, Safety 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Key with Radio Remote Control Unlocking front luggage compartment lid
f Press button 2 for approx. two seconds.
Unlocking the vehicle
f Press button 1. Unlocking rear luggage compartment lid
f Press button 3 for approx. two seconds.
Locking the vehicle
If the vehicle was locked, it is unlocked simultane-
f Press button 1. ously with the luggage compartment.
In vehicles with seat memory the stored seat and
Switching off the alarm system if it is door mirror positions are automatically set.
triggered accidentally The vehicle will be locked again approx.
f Press button 1. 80 seconds after the luggage compartment is
closed if none of the doors was opened.

Note
Your authorized Porsche dealer can program fur-
1- Central locking button ther types of unlocking.
2- Front luggage compartment lid button
3- Rear luggage compartment lid button Type 1
4- Light-emitting diode
The relocking time of the doors can be adjusted to
suit your individual requirements:
10 - 100 seconds.

Type 2
The doors stay locked when the luggage compart-
ment is unlocked.

16 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Malfunction of the remote control The remote-control standby function Operational readiness of the remote
switches off after 7 days control interrupted
The remote control may not function correctly due
to local radio wave interference. The vehicle will If the vehicle is not started or unlocked with the re- Encoded data is transmitted to the vehicle each
then not lock properly. mote control within 7 days, the remote control time the wireless remote control is operated. If the
This can be identified by the missing locking standby function is switched off (to prevent dis- remote control is operated too often outside the
sound and the missing check-back signal of the charging of the vehicle battery). range of the vehicle, this can result in the central
emergency flasher. locking system no longer responding.
1. In this case, unlock the driver’s door with the
In this case, the remote control and vehicle must
If this should occur: key at the door lock.
be synchronized.
Leave the door closed in order to prevent the
f Lock the vehicle with the key in the door.
alarm system from being triggered. Carrying out the synchronization
2. Press button 1 on the remote control. 1. Unlock the driver's door with the key at the
The remote control is now activated again and door lock.
the alarm system is switched off.
2. Open driver’s door and insert the ignition key
into the ignition lock within 10 seconds to
prevent the alarm system from being
triggered.
3. With the key inserted, press and hold button 1
on the remote control for approx. 5 seconds.
The synchronization is now complete.

Operation, Safety 17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Door storage tray
Opening storage tray
f Open the cover C.
Keep the door storage tray C closed while driving
for safety reasons.

Doors Opening unlocked doors from inside

If the door windows are closed, they will be auto- f Slowly pull door handle B.
matically opened by a few millimeters when the
doors are opened and, when the doors are closed,
Opening locked doors from inside
they will be closed again. This makes it easier to
open and close the doors and protects the seals. f Slowly pull door handle B twice.
f Therefore, you should pull the door handle f Please see the chapter “LOCKING CONDITI-
slowly so that the door window can be lowered ONS” on Page 22.
before the door is opened.

Opening doors from outside

f Unlock vehicle with the remote control.
f Slowly pull door handle A.

18 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Central Locking in Cars without f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF AF- Emergency operation – opening
TER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 246.
Alarm System f Unlock the driver’s door with the key at the
f Please see the chapter “SEAT MEMORY” on
This device complies with: door lock.
Page 35.
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Both car doors and the filler flap can be centrally Emergency operation – closing
unlocked or locked with the remote control.
Operation is subject to the following two condi-
Any person remaining in the locked car can f Lock the driver’s door with the key at the door
tions: lock.
open the door with the inner door handle:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter- If there is a defect in the central locking
ference, and 1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door system, all functioning elements of the central
lock. locking system will be locked.
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may 2. Pull inner door handle again to open door. The fault should be remedied immediately at an
cause undesired operation. authorized Porsche dealer.
Automatic relocking
Note Indication by emergency flasher
If the car is unlocked by remote control and none
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio
of the car doors is opened within approx. If the remote control is used for unlocking or
or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifi-
100 seconds, automatic relocking takes place. locking, a response is provided by the emergency
cations to this equipment.
This relocking time can be adapted to your indivi- flasher:
Such modification could void the user’s authority
dual requirements (10 - 100 seconds) by an autho-
to operate the equipment. – Unlocking – single flash.
rized Porsche dealer.
Warning! – Locking – double flash.

Any changes or modifications not expressly

Overload protection
approved by Porsche could void the user’s
authority to operate this equipment. If the central locking system is operated more
than ten times within a minute, further operation is
blocked for 30 seconds.

Operation, Safety 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Locking Type 3
f Press the rocker-switch. Doors lock automatically when the ignition is
Indicator light in the rocker switch lights up if switched on. If doors are opened with the engine
ignition is on. running, they lock again automatically when a
If the doors were locked with the central speed of 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h) is exceeded.
locking switch, they can be opened by pulling
the inner door handle twice. Type 4
The doors do not lock automatically.
Unlocking
f Press the rocker-switch. Note
Indicator light goes off. Automatically locked doors can be unlocked with
the central locking button or opened by pulling on
Automatic door locking the inside door handle twice.

Your authorized Porsche dealer can program On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus,
diverse types of automatic door locking in the the PCM can be used to activate automatic door
control unit of the central locking system. locking.
Central locking switch f Please see the chapter ”Individual Memory“ in
Type 1 the separate PCM operating instructions.
The central locking switch on the dashboard lets Doors lock automatically when the ignition is
you lock and unlock both doors electrically. switched on. Warning!
Note In an emergency situation where you need to
Type 2
exit the car through an automatically locked
If the doors are locked with the key or remote Doors lock automatically when a speed of door, remember the following procedure to
control, they can not be opened by pressing the 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h) is exceeded. open the door.
central locking switch.
f Unlock the doors by pressing the central
locking button or
f pull the inside door handle twice to open the
door.

20 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Central Locking in Cars with Alarm f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF AF- Note
TER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 246.
System On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus,
f Please see the chapter “SEAT MEMORY” on the PCM can be used to activate automatic door
This device complies with: Page 35. locking.
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Both car doors and the filler flap can be centrally f Please see the chapter ”Individual Memory“ in
unlocked or locked with the remote control. the separate PCM operating instructions.
Operation is subject to the following two condi-
tions: A short signal from the alarm horn will draw
your attention to the fact that the following Automatic relocking
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer- components are not completely closed when you
ence, and If the car is unlocked by remote control and none
try to lock the vehicle:
of the car doors is opened within approx.
2. this device must accept any interference re- – Driver’s door (The vehicle cannot be locked if 100 seconds, automatic relocking takes place.
ceived, including interference that may cause the driver’s door is not completely closed) This relocking time can be adapted to your indivi-
undesired operation. dual requirements (10 - 100 seconds) by an autho-
– Passenger’s door
rized Porsche dealer.
Note – Luggage compartment lids
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio
– Glove compartment
or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifi-
cations to this equipment. Unlocking the vehicle by using the key in the door
Such modification could void the user’s authority lock and opening the door may activate the alarm
to operate the equipment. system within 10 seconds.

Warning!
Any changes or modifications not expressly appro-
ved by Porsche could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment.

Operation, Safety 21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Locking conditions Emergency operation – opening Emergency operation – closing
f Lock car once. f Unlock the driver’s door with the key at the f Lock the driver’s door with the key at the door
The doors cannot be opened from the outside. door lock. lock.
Alarm system and passenger compartment Open door within 20 seconds and insert the If there is a defect in the central locking
monitoring are switched on. ignition key into the ignition lock within system, all functioning elements of the central
10 seconds to prevent the alarm system from locking system will be locked.
If a person or animal remains in the vehicle:
being triggered. The alarm system is switched on.
f Quickly lock car twice: The passenger compartment monitoring
The doors cannot be opened from the outside. Note on operation system is switched off.
The passenger compartment monitoring is If the door is not opened within approx. The fault should be remedied immediately at an
switched off. 20 seconds, automatic relocking takes place. authorized Porsche dealer.
The alarm system will be triggered by the next
Unlocking the door with the inner door
unlocking of the door:
handle
f Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock to
Any person remaining in the locked car can open
switch off the alarm system.
the door with the inner door handle:
1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
lock.
2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.

Note
f Inform any person remaining in the car that the
alarm system will be triggered if the door is
opened.

22 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Indication by emergency flasher and Locking
alarm horn f Press the rocker-switch.
Indicator light lights up if ignition is on.
If the remote control is used for unlocking or
locking, a response is provided by the emergency Unlocking
flasher:
f Press the rocker-switch.
– Unlocking – single flash. Indicator light goes out.
– Locking – double flash. If the doors were locked with the central locking
– Locking twice – continuous illumination for switch, they can be opened by pulling the inner
approx. 2 seconds. The passenger compart- door handle:
ment monitoring is switched off. 1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
lock.
2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.

Central locking switch

The central locking switch on the dashboard lets
you lock and unlock both doors electrically.

Note
If the doors are locked with the key or remote
control, they can not be opened by pressing the
central locking switch.

Operation, Safety 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic door locking Note Fault indication
Automatically locked doors can be unlocked with
Your authorized Porsche dealer can program A double horn signal during locking indicates a
the central locking button or opened by pulling on
diverse types of automatic door locking in the defect in the central locking or alarm system.
the inside door handle twice.
control unit of the central locking system.
f Have the defect remedied at an authorized
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus,
Type 1 Porsche dealer.
the PCM can be used to activate automatic door
Doors lock automatically when the ignition is locking.
Overload protection
switched on. f Please see the chapter ”Individual Memory“ in
the separate PCM operating instructions. If the central locking system is operated more
Type 2
than ten times within a minute, further operation is
Doors lock automatically when a speed of Warning! blocked for 30 seconds.
3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h) is exceeded.
In an emergency situation where you need to
Type 3 exit the car through an automatically locked
door, remember the following procedure to
Doors lock automatically when the ignition is open the door.
switched on. If doors are opened with the engine
running, they lock again automatically when a f Unlock the doors by pressing the central
speed of 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h) is exceeded. locking button or
f pull the inside door handle twice to open the
Type 4 door.
The doors do not lock automatically.

24 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 2. this device must accept any interference re- Switching off the alarm system if it is
ceived, including interference that may cause triggered accidentally
undesired operation.
f Unlock the vehicle with the remote control by
Note pressing button 1.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio The alarm system and passenger compartment
or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifi- monitoring system are switched off automatically
cations to this equipment. when the doors are unlocked.
Such modification could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Function indication
Warning! If the alarm system is activated, light-emitting
Any changes or modifications not expressly ap- diode A in the central locking switch flashes.
proved by Porsche could void the user’s authority If, after locking, the light-emitting diode does not
to operate this equipment. flash or, after ten seconds, it emits double flash-
es, then not all alarm contacts are closed.
The alarm system and passenger compartment Additionally, a brief horn signal sounds.
A - Light-emitting diode for alarm system monitoring system are switched on when the
doors are locked with the key or remote control. When the doors are unlocked, the alarm system
and passenger compartment monitoring system
Alarm System, f Please see the chapter “CENTRAL LOCKING IN are switched off and the light-emitting diode goes
Passenger Compartment CARS WITH ALARM SYSTEM” on Page 21. off.
Monitoring Unlocking the vehicle by using the key in the
This device complies with: door lock and opening the door may activate
Part 15 of the FCC Rules the alarm system within 10 seconds.
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Note
Operation is subject to the following two condi-
The passenger compartment monitoring system
tions:
is always switched off when the convertible top is
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer- open.
ence, and

Operation, Safety 25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When the alarm is armed, the following Deactivating the passenger compartment Fault indication
areas are monitored monitoring system for one locking
process A double horn signal during locking indicates a
– Doors defect in the central locking or alarm system.
If a person or animal remains in the car while it is
– Front and rear lids f Have the defect remedied at an authorized
locked, the passenger compartment monitoring
Porsche dealer.
– Convertible-top lock system must be switched off.
– Glove compartment f Quickly lock car twice.
The doors are locked but can be opened from
– Passenger compartment
the inside:
If one of these alarm contacts is interrupted, the
1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
alarm horn sounds for approximately 3 minutes.
lock.
Additionally, the emergency flasher flashes and
the passenger compartment light lightes for ap- 2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
proximately five minutes.
When the alarm is triggered, the light-emitting Note
diode changes over to double flashes. f Inform any person remaining in the car that the
In order not to limit the action range of the passen- alarm system will be triggered if the door is
ger compartment monitoring system: opened.

f Do not fold the seat backrests forward.

26 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f Remove the ignition key to shut off power to Opening/closing windows
the window switches when the vehicle is not
attended by a responsible person. Uninformed The two rocker switches A and B in the driver’s
persons could injure themselves by operating door and the switch in the passenger’s door have
the power windows. a two-stage function:
f In case of danger, release the button on the Opening
car key immediately.
f Press the rocker switch down to the first stage
f Do not leave children in the car unattended. until the window has reached the desired
Risk of an accident. position.

f Do not put anything on or near the windows Closing

that may interfere with the driver’s vision.
f Press the rocker switch upwards to the first
stage until the window has reached the desired
Readiness for operation of power windows position.

– When the ignition is switched on One-touch operation

A - Power window in driver’s door

(engine switched on or off) or f Press the rocker switch upwards or
B - Power window in passenger’s door – with doors closed and ignition key withdrawn, downwards to the second stage.
but only until door is first opened. Window moves to its final position.
Power Windows One-touch operation for closing the door Press again to stop the window in the desired
windows is available only when the ignition is position.
Warning! switched on. One-touch operation for closing the passenger’s
Risk of injury when the door windows close. window is available once the window is approxi-
This applies especially if the windows are mately half-way closed.
closed with the one-touch operation, be-
cause with this function the window goes up
automatically.
f Make sure that fingers, hands, arms or other
parts are not in the way when the windows are
closed.

Operation, Safety 27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Anti-crushing protection Automatic window lowering
If a side window is blocked during closing, it will f Please see the chapter “DOORS” on Page 18.
stop and open again by about an inch.
f Please see the chapter “CONVERTIBLE TOP”
on Page 182.
Warning!
Risk of serious personal injuries. Storing end position of the windows
If the rocker switch is pressed again within
10 seconds of the window being blocked, the If the battery is disconnected and reconnected,
window will close with its full closing force. the windows will not be raised automatically when
Anti-crushing protection is disabled. the door is closed.
f Once the anti-crushing protection acts to stop 1. Close the windows with the rocker switch
the window and opens it slightly, do not press once.
the rocker switch again within 10 seconds
2. Press the rocker switch upwards again to store
without checking to make sure that nothing is
the end position of the windows in the control
blocking the path of the window.
unit.
The window will close with full closing force.

One-touch operation is disabled for 10 seconds

after blockage of a side window.

28 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
f Do not put anything on or near the windows or
the mirrors that may interfere with the driver’s
vision.
Risk of damage to the door mirrors when washing
the vehicle in a car wash.
f Fold in door mirrors before using the car wash.

Adjusting door mirrors

1. Switch on ignition.
2. By turning the control switch A, select the driv-
er’s side or the passenger’s side.

Mirrors Door mirrors 3. Move the door mirror glasses in the appropri-
ate direction by tilting the control switch.
Before driving the vehicle, adjust the outside and
Inside mirror inside mirrors. If the electrical adjustment facility fails
When the mirror is being adjusted, the anti-glare It is important for safe driving that you have clear, f Adjust mirror by pressing on the mirror face.
lever A must point forward. unobstructed vision to the rear.

Basic position: lever forward Automatically swivelling down mirror on

the passenger’s side
Anti-glare position: lever back
f Please see the chapter “PARKING AIDS” on
Page 70.
f Please see the chapter “SEAT MEMORY” on
Page 35.

Operation, Safety 29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Folding in door mirrors 1. Push mirror towards the door window and A - Sensor
continue to hold it (high spring force). B - Switch for automatic anti-glare operation
Warning! C - Light-emitting diode
2. Swivel the locking lever up to the stop and
Danger of injury to fingers if the mirror slowly let go of the mirror. Automatic Anti-Glare Interior
accidentally flips back when being folded in.
Mirror and Door Mirror
f Exercise extreme caution when folding in mir- Unfolding door mirrors
ror by hand. Do not let go of the mirror before Sensors on the front and rear sides of the interior
1. Push mirror towards the door window and mirror measure the incident light.
the locking lever is locked or the mirror is fully
continue to hold it (high spring force). The The mirrors automatically change to anti-glare po-
unfolded.
locking lever disengages automatically. sition or revert to their normal state, depending on
2. Move mirror back to unfolded position by hand. the light intensity.
Do not let go of the mirror beforehand. When reverse gear is selected, automatic anti-
glare operation is switched off.

30 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Note Switching on
The incident light in the area of the sensors must
f Press button.
not be restricted, e.g. by stickers on the wind-
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
shield.
After approx. 15 minutes, the heater switches off
Switching off the automatic anti-glare automatically.
operation The heater can be switched back on by pressing
f Press switch B. the button again.
Light-emitting diode C goes out.
Switching off
Switching on the automatic anti-glare
operation f Press button.
f Press switch B.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out.
Light-emitting diode C lights up.

Warning!
Risk of injury. Electrolyte fluid can emerge Rear Window Defogger,
from a broken mirror glass. Door Mirror Heating
This fluid irritates the skin and eyes.
f If the electrolyte fluid should come into contact
The mirror heater is ready for operation when the
ignition is on.
with the eyes or skin, immediately rinse it off
with clean water.
See a doctor if necessary.
Risk of damage to the paintwork, leather and
plastic parts. Electrolyte fluid can be
removed only while it is still wet.
f Clean the affected parts with water.

Operation, Safety 31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Seat Adjustment and Head Caution! Seat position
Restraints Risk of damage to windshield, sun visor, etc.
An ergonomically correct sitting position is
when the seat is adjusted or folded back or
important for safe and fatigue-free driving.
Warning! forward.
We recommend the following procedure for adjust-
The seat may move unexpectedly if you f Adjust the seat so that the seat backrest is not ing the driver’s seat to suit individual
attempt to adjust while driving. This could in contact with any other object. requirements:
cause sudden loss of control, resulting in se- 1. Vehicles with manual transmission:
rious personal injury or death. The driver and passenger seats provide
Adjust the seat until, with the clutch pedal fully
integrated head restraints in the backrests. The
f Do not adjust seats while the vehicle is in mo- head restraints are not adjustable.
depressed, your leg remains at a slight angle.
tion.
The backrest locks must be engaged at all Vehicles with Porsche Doppelkupplung
Warning! (PDK):
times while the vehicle is in motion.
All occupants, including the driver, should not Adjust the seat until, with your left foot on the
Safety belts only offer protection when the footrest, your left leg remains at a slight angle.
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the
backrest is upright and the belts are properly
head restraints and backrests, respectively, are 2. Rest your outstretched arm on the steering
positioned on the body.
placed in their proper positions so that the risk of wheel.
Improperly positioned safety belts or safety
neck injuries is minimized in the event of a crash. Set the backrest angle (not applicable for
belts worn by passengers in an excessively
reclined position can cause serious personal For proper positioning of the head restraint, the Sports bucket seat) and the steering-wheel
injury or death in an accident. seatback's inclination should be adjusted such position so that your wrist rests on the outer
that the head restraint is in an upright position. rim of the steering wheel. At the same time,
f Do not operate the car with the driver or the shoulders must still be in noticeable
Driver and passenger should be seated upright
passenger backrests excessively reclined contact with the backrest.
and in the center of their seats.
(see “Seat position”).
3. Adjust the seat height (not applicable for
Risk of injury if persons or animals are in the Sports bucket seat) to give yourself enough
movement range of the seat during seat headroom and a good overview of the vehicle.
adjustment.
4. Electrically adjustable seat:
f Adjust the seat so that no-one is put at risk. Adjust the seat angle until your thighs rest
lightly on the seat cushion.

32 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 E Lumbar support
(pelvis and spinal column support)
To permit a relaxed sitting posture, the backrest
curvature is continuously adjustable in vertical and
horizontal directions for individual pelvis and
spinal column support.
f Press the switch in the direction indicated by
the arrow until the desired backrest curvature
is reached.
F Adjusting the backrest side bolsters
(adaptive sports seat only)
f Push forward or pull backward switch F until
the side bolsters are adjusted to the shape of
the body.
G Adjusting the seat cushion side bolsters
(adaptive sports seat only)
Standard seat/sports seat Comfort seat with driver seat memory/
Adaptive sports seat with driver seat f Push forward or pull backward switch G until
A Seat height memory the side bolsters are adjusted to the shape of
f Use lever A in a pumping movement: the body.
f Press the switch in the direction indicated by
Upwards – seat moves upwards
the arrow until the desired setting is reached.
Downwards – seat moves downwards Seat backrest
A Seat height adjustment
B Fore and aft Folding forward
B Fore-and-aft position adjustment
f Raise locking lever B. f Pull up lever H in the side part of the backrest
Move seat to desired position and release C Seat angle adjustment and fold the backrest forward.
lever.
D Backrest angle adjustment
Ensure that the seat engages correctly. Folding back
C Backrest angle f Tilt back and engage the backrest so that it
cannot tip forward when the car is braked.
f Operate switch C until the desired backrest
angle is reached.

Operation, Safety 33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 B Backrest

Folding forward
f Pull loop B in the side part of the backrest and
fold the backrest forward.

Folding back
f Tilt back and engage the backrest so that it
cannot tip forward when the car is braked.

Sports seat/adaptive sports seat only Sports bucket seat

The seat belt can be fixed to the seat backrest f Do not install a child restraint system in
with the retaining strap, so that it can be reached the Sports bucket seat.
more easily for buckling up. The Sports bucket seat cannot be equipped
f Release button J at the top of the retaining with the LATCH system.
strap, insert the seat belt and fasten the strap
A Fore and aft adjustment
once more.
f Raise locking lever A.
Move seat to desired position and release
lever.
Ensure that the seat engages correctly.

34 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning! Recalling seat position
Risk of crushing due to uncontrolled recall of The seat position can only be called up when the
a seat setting. vehicle is stationary.
f Cancel automatic adjustment by pressing any 1. Switch on the ignition or
of the seat adjustment buttons. open the driver’s door.
f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended. 2. Press person button until the seat has reached
its final position.
The setting of door mirrors and lumbar
Operation with person buttons 2, 3 support will be completed even if the person
button is not kept depressed.
Storing seat position
1. Switch on ignition. Note
Reverse gear must not be engaged. Automatic seat adjustment can be interrupted
2. Set the desired seat and door-mirror positions. immediately by releasing the button.

3. Keep memory button M depressed and also

press person button 2 or 3 until an audible
M - Memory button
1 - Key button signal confirms that the position has been
2, 3 - Person buttons stored.
The individual setting is now stored under the
Seat Memory desired person button.

Individual seat and door mirror settings can be

stored and recalled for the driver’s position.
You cannot store the position of the side bolsters
of the adaptive sports seat.
Further individual setting options are available in
vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus.
f Please observe the chapter “Individual
Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.

Operation, Safety 35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating with the remote control of the Storing individual lowered position of the Recalling seat position
vehicle key passenger’s door mirror as a parking aid
f Unlock the locked vehicle or the luggage
Once the driver's seat setting has been stored, an compartment with the remote control.
Each remote control (up to six) can be assigned an
individual lowered position of the passenger's The stored seat position is automatically set.
individual seat and door mirror position.
door mirror may be stored for driving in reverse:
The stored seat and door mirror position is set au- The seat position assigned to a remote control
tomatically when the vehicle is unlocked using the 1. Apply the handbrake. can also be recalled with the key button 1 if the
corresponding remote control. corresponding key was used to switch on the
2. Switch the ignition on with the desired car key.
ignition.
Storing seat position 3. Engage reverse gear.
If no seat position has been assigned to a remote
1. Switch the ignition on with the desired car key. 4. Select passenger side with mirror switch. control, the key button will not work.
Reverse gear must not be engaged. The passenger’s mirror swivels downwards.
Note on operation
2. Set the desired seat and door-mirror positions. 5. Set passenger’s door mirror to desired final
position. Automatic seat adjustment can be interrupted
3. Keep memory button M depressed and also
immediately:
press key button 1 until an audible signal 6. Keep memory button M depressed and also
confirms that the position has been stored. press key button 1 until an audible signal f by switching on the ignition,
The individual setting is now assigned to this confirms that the position has been stored. f by pressing the central locking button,
remote control and to the key button. The individual setting is now assigned to this
It is necessary to wait for at least 15 seconds remote control and to the key button. f by pressing any memory or seat adjustment
between locking and unlocking the door. button.

Clearing the stored seat position

1. Switch the ignition on with the desired car key.
2. Press memory button twice and key button 1
once consecutively.

36 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Switching on
High heating power
f Press button once.
Both yellow light-emitting diodes in the button
light up.

Low heating power

f Press button twice.
One yellow light-emitting diode in the button
lights up.

Switching off
f Press button as often as necessary until the
light-emitting diodes go out.

A - Seat heating, left

B - Seat heating, right

Heated Seats
Two-stage seat heating is ready for operation
when the engine is running.
The yellow light-emitting diodes in the button show
witch stage is currently activated.

Operation, Safety 37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Seat Ventilation
The three-stage seat ventilation is ready for opera-
tion when the engine is running and from an
ambient cabin temperature of 58 °F (15 °C).
The three stages are controlled with the buttons
on the control panel for the air conditioning.
The blue light-emitting diodes in the buttons show
which stage is currently activated.

Note
The full effect of the seat ventilation can be
achieved only if you are wearing breathable
clothing.
Seat ventilation and seat heating can be used at
the same time and provide excellent seating
comfort when used in the right combination. A - Seat ventilation, left Steering Wheel Adjustment
f Do not use protective seat covers. B - Seat ventilation, right
Warning!
Low ventilation
Switching on seat ventilation Risk of accident.
f Press button three times. The steering wheel may move further than
High ventilation One light-emitting diode lights up. desired if you attempt to adjust it when
driving.
f Press button once.
Three light-emitting diodes light up. Switching off seat ventilation You can lose control of the vehicle, causing
serious personal injury or death.
f Press button as often as necessary until all
Medium ventilation f Do not adjust the steering wheel when driving.
light-emitting diodes go out.
f Press button twice.
Two light-emitting diodes light up.

38 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Adjusting steering wheel height and Switching on steering wheel heating
longitudinal direction
f Press button.
1. Insert ignition key fully into ignition lock. The message “Steering wheel heating ON”
is displayed on the on-board computer for
2. Push the locking lever downwards.
2 seconds.
3. Adjust steering wheel to fit the chosen
backrest angle and your seat position by Switching off steering wheel heating
moving the steering wheel up or down and
longitudinally. f Press button.
4. Swivel locking lever back until you feel it en- The message “Steering wheel heating OFF”
gage. is displayed on the on-board computer for
If necessary, move steering wheel slightly lon- 2 seconds.
gitudinally.

Steering Wheel Heating

The steering wheel heating can be switched on
and off with the button on the rear of the steering
wheel when the ignition is switched on.

Operation, Safety 39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Multi-Functional Steering Wheel Operating the function keys
f Please read the separate PCM operating
Warning!
instructions before operating the function
There is a danger of accident if you set or keys.
operate the on-board computer, radio,
The rotary knobs at the top left and right of the
navigation system, telephone or other
steering wheel can also be pressed.
equipment when driving.
Operating these devices while driving could Turn volume control
distract you from traffic and cause you to Upwards – increase volume.
lose control of the vehicle. Downwards – decrease volume.
f Operate these components while driving only if Press volume control
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely. To switch volume/mute on and off.

f Carry out any complicated operating or setting Turn rotary knob

procedures only while the vehicle is stationary. To select/mark function in the PCM within
a menu. To do this, turn the rotary knob
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, you upward or downward.
can use the function keys of the multi-functional Readiness for operation of multi- Press rotary knob
steering wheel to operate the following Porsche functional steering wheel To activate selected function.
communication systems:
The multi-functional steering wheel is ready for Press screen button
– PCM To call the stored PCM function.
operation when the ignition and PCM are switched
– Telephone on. The button can be assigned the desired
function in the PCM.
– Radio with CD-Drive
Press Back button
– CD-Audio To move back in the PCM menu.

Press Handset Pickup button

To accept a telphone call.

Press Handset Hangup button

To end or refuse a telephone call.

40 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vanity mirror
The vanity mirror on the rear of the sun visor is
covered by a lid.

Warning!
Risk of injury in an accident or risk of dam-
age to mirror lid and convertible top.
f Keep the lid closed while driving and when
closing the convertible top.
Risk of damage.
f Do not force the lid beyond its end position.

The vanity mirror illumination is switched on auto-

matically when the cover is opened (arrow).

Sun Visors
f Swing the sun visors down to prevent glare
from the front.

Operation, Safety 41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Safety Belts f Belts should not be worn twisted. f The belts must be kept clean or the retractors
may not work properly.
f Do not wear belts over rigid or breakable ob-
Warning! Please see the chapter “CAR CARE INSTRUC-
jects in or on your clothing, such as eye glass-
TIONS” on Page 213.
Always make sure your and your passenger’s es, pens, keys, etc. as these may cause injury.
f Never bleach or dye safety belts.
safety belts are properly fastened while the f Several layers of heavy clothing may interfere
vehicle is in motion. with proper positioning of belts. f Do not allow safety belts to retract until they
Failure to follow safety belt warnings may re- are completely dry after cleaning or this may
f Belts must not rub against sharp objects or
sult in serious personal injury or death. cause damage to the belt.
damage may occur to the belt.
f For your and your passenger’s protection, use
f Two occupants should never share the same
safety belts at all times while the vehicle is in
belt at the same time. Belt tensioner
motion.
Care and maintenance
f Use appropriate child restraint systems for all Depending on the force of an impact, fastened
small children. f Keep belt buckles free of any obstruction that safety belts are tightened in an accident.
may prevent a secure locking.
Proper wearing of safety belts The belt tensioners are triggered in:
f Belts that have been subjected to excessive
f Safety belts must be positioned on the body as – Front, side and rear impacts of sufficient
stretch forces in an accident must be inspect-
to restrain the upper body and lap from sliding severity.
ed or replaced to ensure their continued effec-
forward. Improperly positioned safety belts
tiveness in restraining you. – In cases of vehicle rollover.
can cause serious personal injury or death in
The same applies to belt tensioner systems
case of an accident.
which have been triggered. Note
f The shoulder belt should always rest on your In addition, the anchor points of the belts The belt-tensioner system can be triggered only
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be should be checked. once; the system must be replaced afterward.
worn behind your back or under your arm.
f If safety belts do not work properly, see your If there is a fault in the belt-tensioner system, the
f For maximum effectiveness, the lap belt authorized Porsche dealer immediately. airbag warning light lights up.
should be worn low across the hips.
f If the belts show damage to webbing, bindings, Work may be performed on the belt-tensioner sys-
f Pregnant women should position the belt as buckles or retractors, they should be replaced tem only by an authorized Porsche dealer.
low as possible across the pelvis. Make sure it to ensure safe operation. Smoke is released when the belt tensioners are
is not pressing against the abdomen.
f Do not modify or disassemble the safety belts triggered. This does not indicate a fire in the
in your vehicle. vehicle.

42 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Inertia reel retractor Releasing the safety belt
The combination lap/shoulder belt with inertia reel f Push in release button (arrow) on buckle. Belt
locking mechanism adjusts automatically to your tongue will spring out of buckle.
size and movements as long as the pull on the belt
f To release a latched belt, lean back to take the
is slow.
body pressure off the belt.
Rapid deceleration during hard braking or a colli-
f To store lap/shoulder belt, allow the belt to re-
sion locks the belt. The belt will also lock when you
tract as you guide the latch to its stowed posi-
drive up or down a steep hill or in a sharp curve,
tion.
otherwise, the shoulder belt will not inhibit your
upper body movement. f Please see the chapter “AUTOMATIC LOCKING
RETRACTOR” on Page 52.
Fastening the safety belt
Cleaning the safety belts
f Assume a comfortable sitting position.
If it becomes necessary to clean the belts, you
f Please see the chapter “SEAT POSITION” on
can use any mild washing agent. Allow the belts to
Page 32.
dry prior to retracting, but avoid direct sunlight.
f The shoulder belt should always rest on your
Safety Belt Warning System f Only use suitable cleaners. If unsuitable
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be
cleaners are used or any attempt is made to
worn behind your back or under your arm.
An audio-visual warning system is interconnect- dye or bleach the belts, the webbing may be
ed with the driver’s safety belt. f Grasp belt and pull the belt in a continuous weakened and thus constitute a safety risk.
slow motion across your chest and lap.
Every time the ignition is turned on, the gong will
sound for about 6 seconds to remind driver and f Insert belt tongue into buckle on inboard side
passenger to buckle up. of seat. Push down until it securely locks with
In addition, the gong will sound for approx. 90 sec- an audible click. Pull the belt to check.
onds if vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph/24 km/h. f Pull shoulder section to make sure belt fits
The safety belt warning lights in the instrument snugly across the pelvis.
panel and on-board computer will go off as soon
as the driver has buckled up. f Belts should fit snugly across the pelvis and
chest. Make sure there is no slack in the belt.

Operation, Safety 43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Airbag Systems Danger! f Always keep the lid of the door storage com-
partment closed. Objects must not protrude
To provide optimal occupant protection, air-
The airbags in combination with the safety belts out of the door storage compartment.
bags must inflate at very high speed. If you
make up a safety system which offers the driver
are not wearing your safety belt or are too f No changes may be made to the wiring or
and the passenger the greatest known protection
close to the airbag when it is deployed, infla- components of the airbag system.
from injuries in case of accident.
ting airbags can result in serious personal in-
Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing sys- f Do not add any additional coverings or stickers
jury or death.
tem for the passenger's seat in accordance with to the steering wheel or in the area of the pas-
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. f Make sure there are no people, animals or ob- senger airbag, side airbags and head airbags.
jects between the driver or passenger and the Doing so may adversely affect the functioning
Even if your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the
area into which the airbag inflates. of the airbag system or cause harm to the oc-
safety belts must be worn at all times,
cupants if the airbag system should deploy.
because the front airbag system is only deployed f Sit back as far from the dashboard or steering
Do not use protective seat covers.
by frontal collisions with an impact of sufficient wheel as is practical, while still maintaining full
severity. vehicle control. f Do not modify the seat coverings. Do not at-
tach additional cushions, protective coverings,
Below the deployment threshold of the airbag sys- f Always hold the steering wheel by the outer
or pillows to the passenger's seat. Do not affix
tem, and during types of collisions which do not rim. Never rest your hands on the airbag panel.
things to the passenger's seat or cover it with
cause the actuation of the system, the safety belts
f Always fasten seat belts because triggering other materials. Do not cover the back of the
provide the primary protection to the occupants
of the airbag system depends on the force and backrest. Do not make changes to the passen-
when correctly worn.
angle of impact. ger's seat and to the seat base frame.
Therefore, all persons within the vehicle
must wear safety belts at all times (in many f Do not transport heavy objects on or in front of f Do not undertake any wiring for electrical ac-
states, state law requires the use of safety belts). the passenger’s seat. These could impair the cessory equipment in the vicinity of the airbag
function of the airbag, the seat belts, and wiring harnesses. Doing so may disable the air-
f Please see the chapter “SAFETY BELTS” on
weight sensing. bag system or cause inadvertent inflation.
Page 42.
f Do not hang objects (e.g. jackets, coats, coat f If the warning light comes on, the airbag sys-
The front airbags are located under the padded
hangers) over the backrest. tem should be repaired immediately by your
steering wheel panel on the driver’s side and, on
authorized Porsche dealer.
the passenger's side, in the dashboard.
The side airbags are installed on the side in the f Always keep feet in the footwell while driving.
seat backrests. Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat
The head airbags are installed in the door linings. area. Do not lean against the inside of the door
or outside the window while the vehicle is mov-
ing.

44 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f Using accessories not approved by Porsche Function of the airbag system higher speed accidents where the vehicle decele-
can cause the weight sensing system to be im- rates over a long time. Since airbag deployment
paired. Airbags are a supplemental safety system. Your does not occur in all accidents, this further em-
primary protection comes from your safety belts. phasizes the need for you and your passenger to
f Do not squeeze objects, such as the fire extin-
always wear safety belts.
guisher, or first aid kit under the seat. The front airbags are triggered during a frontal
collision of sufficient force and direction. Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
f Only have seats removed and installed by an
In the event of a side impact of corresponding diagnostic module. This module will record the
authorized Porsche dealer so that weight sens-
force, the side airbag on the impact side is use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver
ing components will not be damaged.
triggered. and passenger when the airbags and/or belt ten-
f Give your passenger all of the information in sioner work.
The inflation process generates the amount of gas
this chapter.
required to fill the airbags at the necessary pres-
sure in fractions of a second. Advanced Airbag
Note
Airbags help to protect the head and upper body, Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing sys-
Airbag components (e.g. steering wheel, door lin- while simultaneously damping the motion of the tem for the passenger's seat in accordance with
ing, seats) may be disassembled only by an autho- driver and passenger in the impact direction in the U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208.
rized Porsche dealer. event of a frontal impact or side impact. Depending on the weight acting on the passen-
When disposing of a used airbag unit, our safety In order to help provide protection in severe colli- ger's seat, the passenger's airbag will automati-
instructions must be followed. These instructions sions which can cause death and serious injury, cally be switched on and off.
can be obtained at any authorized Porsche dealer. airbags must inflate extremely rapidly. Such high Depending on the angle and force of impact, the
speed inflation has a negative but unavoidable passenger's airbag which is activated will be trig-
side effect, which is that it can and does cause in- gered during a collision.
juries, including facial and arm abrasions, bruising
and broken bones. You can help minimize such in- Precondition for switching the passenger's airbag
juries by always wearing your safety belts. on and off, depending on weight:

There are many types of accidents in which air- – Vehicles equipped with key-operated airbag
bags are not expected to deploy. These include deactivation device:
accidents where the airbags would provide no be- Switch position AUTO.
nefit, such as a rear impact against your vehicle. – Ignition key is inserted.
Other accidents where the airbags are designed
not to deploy are those where the risk of injury Improper handling of the weight sensing system
from the airbag deployment could exceed any pro- can unintentionally impair switching the
tective benefits, such as in low speed accidents or passenger's airbag off and on.

Operation, Safety 45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Seat adjustment for the passenger's seat f Do not transport a load and objects behind and Automatic deactivation of the passenger’s
under the passenger's seat. airbags
Danger! If the load or objects are under the seat, it can
cause malfunctions. Danger!
Safety belts only offer protection when the
backrest is upright and the belts are properly If the weight on the passenger's seat is reduced The use of a child restraint system in the pas-
positioned on the body. Improperly positio- significantly, e.g., by supporting weight on the senger seat can result in serious personal
ned safety belts can cause serious personal armrest, the passenger's airbag can be switched injury or death to the child from an airbag
injury or death in an accident. off. deployment.
f Do not operate the car with the driver or pas- f Select an upright seat position, and do not sup- f Please see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG
senger backrest excessively reclined. port weight on the armrests or lean out of the OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
window. on Page 47.
f Porsche recommends the use of L.A.T.C.H. Always keep feet in the footwell while driving.
(Lower Ancorage and Tether for Children) Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat f Before transporting a child on the passenger’s
equipped Porsche child seat. area. Do not lean against the inside of the door seat:
Do not install a child restraint system in or outside the window while the vehicle is mo- Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
the Sports bucket seat. ving. SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
If the passenger's seat is warped significantly, a f Do not install a child restraint system in
equipped with the LATCH system.
message is displayed on the on-board computer: the Sports bucket seat.
If the seat is in an extreme position (e.g., the back- f Correct the seat adjustment. – When an up to one-year old child is seated
rest is in contact with the engine compartment
wall), the backrest can warp. Warping of the back- f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE in the child restraint system, the front airbag is
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD automatically deactivated on the passenger
rest can lead to malfunctions.
COMPUTER” on Page 162. side.
f Correct the seat adjustment.
– When an adult is seated in the front seat the
Ensure that the seat is not jammed and is self- Vehicle modifications to accommodate front airbag remains active on the passenger‘s
supporting. persons with disabilities side.
Ensure that the backrest is in the upright posi-
tion. Because modifications to your vehicle could com-
promise your advanced airbag system, please call
1-800-PORSCHE prior to having your vehicle modi-
fied.

46 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The condition of the passenger’s front airbag is PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
shown by the indicator lamp. does not light up
If in doubt: – The passenger's airbag is active and ready for
operation.
f Please see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP” – If the passenger's seat is not occupied, the
on Page 47. PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will
also not light up, even though the passenger's
f Please see the chapter “KEY-OPERATED AIR-
airbag is switched off.
BAG DEACTIVATION DEVICE” on Page 49.
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT Danger!
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
Risk of serious personal injury or death due
f Please see the chapter “LATCH SYSTEM to the passenger airbag triggering unintenti-
CHILD SEAT BRACKET ON THE PASSENGER’S onally.
SEAT” on Page 54.
When the ignition key is insterted and the up
Note to one-year old child is seated in the child re-
straint system on the passenger’s seat, the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp f After inserting the ignition key, the PASSEN- indicator lamp ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“
GER AIRBAG OFF warning light lights up for a must be on.
Note on operation few seconds as a bulb check.
If the ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“ indicator
Although not desired, it can occur in the case of PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lamp does not light up, it could indicate a
heavier children that the passenger’s airbag lights up fault in the system.
remains active or, in the case of very light adults In this case:
or young persons, that the passenger airbag is – The passenger's airbag is switched off.
deactivated. f On vehicles with key-operated airbag deactiva-
tion device: Switch to position OFF.
f On vehicles without key-operated airbag deac-
tivation device: Do not drive.
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest autho-
rized Porsche dealer.

Operation, Safety 47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Note Airbag maintenance
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
In order to ensure long-term functioning, the air-
airbag in combination with the LATCH attachment
bag system must be inspected by an authorized
bracket are not installed at the factory. They can
Porsche dealer at the intervals recommended in
be retrofitted.
your Maintenance Booklet.
f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Important information
Warning light and warning If you sell your Porsche, notify the purchaser that
message the vehicle is equipped with airbags, and refer
them to the chapter, “Airbag Systems“, in the
Faults are indicated by a warning light in the instru-
Owner's Manual (safety and disposal rules).
ment panel and a message on the on-board com-
puter. Further information on the airbag system can be
found on stickers attached to the sun visors.
f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD For special recommendations on the use of child
COMPUTER” on Page 162. restraints:
f In the following cases you should immedi- f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
ately consult an authorized Porsche SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
dealer in order to assure the airbag sys-
tem is functioning properly:
– If the warning light does not light up when the
ignition key is inserted or
– If the warning light does not go out once the
engine is running or
– If the warning light appears while driving.

48 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning light ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“
If the airbag on the passenger’s side is switched
off:
– Warning light “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” is
continuously lit when the ignition key is
inserted.

Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death from
the passenger’s airbag.
If the ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“ warning
light is not lit when the ignition key is inserted
and the Airbag OFF switch is switched to the
OFF-Position, this could indicate a fault in the
system.
f Do not install a child restraint system on the
Key-operated airbag deactivation device PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp passenger’s seat.

In case your vehicle is equipped with LATCH, you f Have the fault remedied immediately.
Danger!
can switch off (OFF) the passenger’s front airbag Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
manually. In the automatic mode (AUTO), the air- Risk of serious personal injury or death for
bag will be switched on or off automatically de- passenger if passenger’s airbag remains Note
pending on the weight on the passenger seat. switched off after the child restraint system
is removed. f Do not install a child restraint system in the
f Switch off the passenger’s airbag on the key Sports bucket seat.
switch using the vehicle key. f Make sure that the key switch is switched to
AUTO once the child seat has been removed, The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
A Switch position AUTO – passenger’s front in order to provide protection to the adult airbag in combination with the LATCH attachment
airbag is active occupants. bracket are not installed at the factory. They can
be retrofitted (not on vehicles with Sports bucket
B Switch position OFF – passenger’s front airbag
seats).
is switched off
f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.

Operation, Safety 49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Child Restraint Systems tion manual provided with the restraint. Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death to the
f Do not install a child restraint system in the Danger! child.
Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be equipped The use of a child restraint system in the pas- f Follow all child restraint instructions and
with the LATCH system. senger seat can result in serious personal in- warnings in this manual.
jury or death to the child from an airbag
Porsche recommends that all infants and children deployment. – When using an infant or child restraint system,
be restrained in child restraint systems at all times To reduce risk of injury from an inflating air- be sure to follow all manufacturer's instruc-
while the vehicle is in motion in accordance with bag in an accident, Porsche strongly recom- tions on installation and use.
applicable laws. mends:
– Infants and small children should never be held
Use only child restraint systems with the LATCH- f Please see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG on the lap, nor should they share a safety belt
system recommended by Porsche. These sys- OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP” with another occupant while the vehicle is in
tems have been tested and adjusted to the interior on Page 47. motion.
of your Porsche and the appropriate child weight
groups. Other systems have not been tested and f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT – Children too big for child restraint systems
could entail an increased risk of injury or death. SYSTEMS” on Page 50. should use regular safety belts. A shoulder belt
You can obtain child seats that are LATCH compa- f Do not install a child restraint system in can be used providing it does not cross the
the Sports bucket seat. face or the neck of the child.
tible at your authorized Porsche dealer.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be equipped – Choose a child restraint system according to
f Always see the separate installation with the LATCH system. the weight of the child.
instructions for your child seat.
– Child restraint systems that are damaged or
The use of infant or child restraints is required by Note
have been heavily stressed in an accident must
law in all 50 states of the U.S. and all Canadian
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s be replaced immediately.
provinces. The child restraint system should be
airbag and the LATCH attachment bracket are not
one that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle – Children could be endangered in a crash if their
installed at the factory. They can be retrofitted (not
Safety Standards and should be secured by a lap child restrains are not properly secured in the
on vehicles with Sports bucket seats).
belt or lap belt portion of a lapshoulder belt or for vehicle.
child seats equipped with the LATCH sytem (Lo- f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
– Do not affix things to child restraint systems or
wer Anchorage and Tether for Children, also
cover it with other materials.
known as ISOFIX) to the LATCH anchorages.
A statement by the seat manufacturer of compli-
ance with this standard can be found on the in-
struction label on the restraint and in the instruc-

50 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 – Your authorized Porsche dealer will be glad to Direction of installation for child restraint Using child restraint systems in the
advise you about the installation possibility for systems passenger seat
a Porsche child restraint system which allows
a key-operated airbag deactivation of the pas- Group 0 and 0+: Children up to 29 lbs (13 kg) f Do not install a child restraint system in the
senger’s airbag. Sports bucket seat.
Children of this weight must be transported in a
– The key-operated airbag deactivation device restraint system which is installed on the passen-
ger’s seat facing rearward. Danger!
installation requires special programming
available only from your authorized Porsche The use of a child restraint system in the pas-
dealer. Group I: Children between 20 lbs (9 kg) and 40 lbs senger seat can result in serious personal
injury or death to the child from an airbag
f Please see the chapter “KEY-OPERATED AIR- Children of this weight are held in child restraint
systems facing forward. deployment.
BAG DEACTIVATION DEVICE” on Page 49.
To reduce risk of injury from an inflating air-
Group II: Children in between 33 lbs (15 kg) and bag in an accident, Porsche strongly recom-
55 lbs (25 kg) mends:
Children of this weight are held in child restraint f Please see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG
systems facing forward. OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
on Page 47.
Group III: Children in between 49 lbs (22 kg) and
80 lbs (36 kg) f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
Children of this weight are held in child restraint
systems facing forward. f Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
f The vehicle seat must be adjusted so that it is The Sports bucket seat cannot be equipped
in its lower rear position. with the LATCH system.

Operation, Safety 51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Child restraint system for up to one-year old Child restraint system for children older than Automatic locking retractor
children one year
f Do not install a child restraint system in
– Make sure that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing sys-
the Sports bucket seat.
indicator lamp lights up. tem for the passenger's seat in accordance with
The Sports bucket seat cannot be equipped
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208.
– Adjust the passenger's seat as far away from with the LATCH system.
Depending on the weight acting on the passen-
the airbag as possible.
ger's seat, the passenger's airbag will automati- The safety belt for the passenger is equipped with
cally be switched on or off. an automatic locking retractor for securing the
Danger!
child restraint system. When activated, this retrac-
Risk of serious personal injury or death due Small adult passengers tor allows you to securely fasten the child restraint
to the passenger airbag triggering uninten- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indi- system in place so that inadvertent movements
tionally. cator lamp does not light up. will not occur.
When the ignition is on and the up to one- Before transporting a child on the passenger seat:
year old child is seated in the child restraint Danger!
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
system on the passenger seat the indicator Risk of serious personal injury or death due SYSTEMS” on Page 50.
lamp ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“ must be on. to the passenger airbag not triggering.
If the ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“ indicator When the ignition key is inserted on and the Danger!
lamp does not light up, it could indicate a small adult passenger is seated on the pas- Risk of serious personal injury or death to the
fault in the system. senger’s seat, the indicator lamp ”PASSEN- child, when excessive force is acting on the
In this case: GER AIRBAG OFF“ must be off. passenger's seat due to the seat belt.
f Do not use a child restraint system on the pas- If the ”PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“ indicator In such cases, the passenger's airbag can be
senger’s seat. lamp lights up, it could indicate a fault in the switched on unintentionally.
f On vehicles with key-operated airbag deactiva- system. f After fastening the child restraint system, do
tion device: Switch to position OFF. In this case: not adjust the seat.
f On vehicles without key-operated airbag deac- f Do not carry a passenger in the passenger’s f Check the condition of the passenger’s airbag
tivation device: Do not drive. seat. shown by the indicator lamp in the central con-
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest autho- f Have the fault remedied at the nearest authori- sole.
rized Porsche dealer. zed Porsche dealer.

52 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Activating the automatic locking retractor Releasing the safety belt
1. If a child restraint system must be fastened to 1. Unbuckle the safety belt latch.
the passenger's seat, adjust the passenger's
2. Then make certain that the belt has fully retrac-
seat as far away from the airbag as possible.
ted. At this point the automatic locking feature
2. Fasten child seat. will be disengaged.
Seek appropriate advice from your authorized
3. Pull the safety belt retractor completely out. At
Porsche dealer about the possible installation
this point the locking mechanism is activated.
of a Porsche child restraint system.
4. Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle
and make certain that it is properly latched.
Make no more adjustments to the seat.
5. Allow the safety belt to retract until it is tight on
the child restraint system. You may further tigh-
ten the belt by pulling on it to allow more of it
to retract.
Make sure that excessive seat belt forces do
not occur by moving the seat with the child
seat installed.

Operation, Safety 53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 LATCH System
Child seat bracket on the passenger’s
seat
f Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be equipped
with the LATCH system.
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
airbag and the LATCH attachment bracket are not
installed at the factory. They can be retrofitted (not
on vehicles with Sports bucket seats).
f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Porsche recommends the use of a Porsche Child
Seat with Lower Anchorage and Tether for Child-
ren system (LATCH).
These systems have been tested and adjusted to Installing a LATCH child seat system
the interior of your Porsche and the appropriate
child weight groups. Other systems have not been 1. Secure the child seat to retaining lugs A as out-
tested and could entail an increased risk of injury. lined in the instruction manual for the child
seat.
You can obtain child seats that are LATCH compa-
tible at your authorized Porsche dealer. 2. Pull the child seat to check that both fastening
points are engaged correctly.
f Always see the separate installation instruc-
tions for your child seat. Note
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT f Make sure that the key switch is switched to
SYSTEMS” on Page 50. AUTO once the child seat has been removed,
in order to provide protection to the adult
occupants.

54 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Setting the parking brake
f Pull the lever all the way up (arrow).
With the ignition on, the parking brake warning
lights in the instrument panel and on-board
computer will come on if the lever is even
slightly raised. A firm pull upward is required to
properly engage the parking brake.
If the brake is not fully set, the vehicle may roll
without control.
f Move the selector lever to “P” (PDK) or move
the gearshift lever to reverse or first gear
(Manual transmission).
f Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully set and the vehicle is not
moving at all.

Sports Exhaust System Parking Brake Danger!

Parking brake force is mechanically transferred to Risk of serious personal injury or death. A
Switching on and off the rear wheels by means of cables. partially engaged parking brake may allow
the vehicle to roll, causing serious personal
The sports exhaust system can be switched on f Use the parking brake only after the vehicle injury or death to any person in its path.
and off when the ignition is switched on using has come to a full stop.
button A. f Engage the parking brake fully.
When the sports exhaust system is switched on,
the light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
Releasing the parking brake
f Pull the lever slightly up as you depress the re-
lease button, and then push the lever all the
way down.

Operation, Safety 55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Parking brake warning light USA Brakes Brake system function
f Make it a habit to check the operation of your Your Porsche is equipped with a power assisted
Parking brake warning light brakes before driving. hydraulic dual circuit brake system with disc
Canada Keep in mind that the braking distance increases
brakes at the front and rear.
Both circuits function independently. One brake
The warning lights in the instrument panel and on- very rapidly as the speed increases. At 60 mph or
circuit operates the front and the other operates
board computer will go out after the parking brake 100 km/h, for example, it is not twice but four
the rear.
is fully released. times longer than 30 mph or 50 km/h. Tire trac-
The warning lights are not an indicator that the tion is also less effective when the roads are wet If one brake circuit has failed, the other will still op-
parking brake is fully set; it is only intended to be or slippery. erate. However, you will notice an increased pedal
travel when you apply the brakes.
a warning to release the parking brake before f Therefore, always maintain a safe distance
driving the car. Failure of one brake circuit will cause the stopping
from the car in front of you.
distance to increase.
Caution! Vehicles without Porsche Ceramic Compos-
ite Brake (PCCB) Warning!
A partially engaged brake will overheat the
rear brakes, reduce their effectiveness and Even though the brake discs consist of alloyed Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
cause excessive wear. grey cast iron, they will unavoidably start to cor- sonal injury or death.
rode if your car is parked for an extended period. In the unlikely event of hydraulic failure of
f Release the parking brake fully. one brake circuit:
The brakes will tend to “rub” as a result.
f When parking your car, always set the parking
The nature, extent and effects of corrosion de- f Push the brake pedal down firmly and hold it in
pend on the amount of time the vehicle was that position.
brake by pulling all the way up on the lever.
parked, whether granular or liquid road salt was A mechanical linkage activates the second cir-
f Move the selector lever to “P” (PDK) or move spread and whether grease-dissolving agents cuit, and you will be able to bring the vehicle to
the gearshift lever to reverse or first gear were used in car washes. a stop.
(Manual transmission). To prevent corrosion of the brake discs, ”brake
them dry“ before parking the car. f After bringing your vehicle to a complete stop,
f On hills also turn the front wheels towards the avoid driving the vehicle and instead have it
If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired, we
curb. towed to the nearest authorized Porsche deal-
recommend having the brake system checked by
experts at an authorized Porsche dealer. er for repair.

56 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Brake system warning light Brake pedal Warning!
You can check the functionality of the brake To avoid overheating and premature wear of
system warning light by switching the ignition to Warning! the brakes:
the "On" position and verifying that the warning Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per- f Before descending a steep grade, reduce
light illuminates. sonal injury or death. speed and shift the transmission into a lower
Any obstruction of the brake pedal could gear or driving position to control speed.
Brake warning light USA increase the stopping distance.
f Do not “ride the brakes” by resting your foot on
f Always check the movement of the brake pedal the pedal when not intending to apply brake
Brake warning light Canada before driving and make sure that it is not ob- pressure.
structed by a floor mat or any other object.
f Do not hold the pedal down too long or too
f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding
If the warning lights in the instrument panel and on-
board computer go on while driving, the brake flu- often.
into positions that could interfere with the safe This could cause the brakes to get hot and not
id level may be too low, or (if the brake pedal travel
operation of your vehicle. function properly.
has increased) one of the two brake circuits may
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you
have failed.
nonskid floor mats of the correct size. f Please see the chapter “DRIVE-OFF ASSIS-
A greater braking pressure will be required, stop- TANT” on Page 173.
ping distances will be longer and the braking be- Note
havior will change, particularly in curves.
In case one of the two brake circuits fails, in-
With correctly adjusted brakes, and a correctly creased pedal travel is required to bring your
working brake system, the pedal travel to the vehicle to a full stop.
point of brake actuation should be 1-3/16 in. to
1-9/16 in. or 30 to 40 mm.
Whenever the brake pedal travel exceeds this dis-
tance, have the brake system checked.

Operation, Safety 57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Brake booster Brake wear Brake pads and brake discs
The brake booster assists braking only when Your car has excellent brakes, but they are still Wear on the brake pads and brake discs depends
the engine is running. subject to wear. The rate at which they wear de- to a great extent on the driving style and the con-
pends on how the brakes are used. ditions of use and therefore cannot be expressed
When the car is moving while the engine is not run-
in actual miles on the road.
ning, or if the brake booster is defective, more f Have the brake system inspected at the
pressure on the brake pedal is required to bring intervals recommended in your Maintenance The high-performance brake system is designed
the car to a stop. Booklet. for optimal braking effect at all speeds and tem-
If this happens, ABS and PSM will also not oper- peratures.
ate. Brake system warning light Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient
You can check the functionality of the brake conditions (such as temperature and humidity)
Moisture or road salt on brakes affects braking.
system warning light by switching the ignition to therefore might cause “brake noises”.
Brakes will dry after a few cautious brake applica-
tions. the "On" position and verifying that the warning
New brake pads or linings
light illuminates.
Warning! New brake pads and brake discs have to be “bro-
Warning light USA ken in”, and therefore only attain optimal friction
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per- when the car has covered several hundred miles
sonal injury or death. or km.
Driving through water may reduce the trac- Warning light Canada The slightly reduced braking ability must be com-
tion. pensated for by pressing the brake pedal harder.
Moisture on brakes from road water, car If the warning lights in the instrument panel and on- This also applies whenever the brake pads and
wash, or coating of road salt may affect board computer stay on when the engine is run- brake discs are replaced.
braking efficiency. ning or come on while driving, the brake pads are
worn excessively.
f Cautiously apply brakes to test brakes after ex-
posure to road water, etc. f Do not continue to operate the vehicle.
Have your authorized Porsche dealer inspect
or replace the brake pads.

58 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 ABS Brake System Warning! Operation of the ABS system
(Antilock Brake System) The increased control that is provided should
A wheel speed sensor is mounted to each of the
not induce you to take greater risks with your
The ABS system represents a major contribution four wheels. If wheel lock-up of either of the front
safety. The limits dictated by the laws of
to the enhancement of active safety in your vehi- wheels or the rear wheels is sensed during brak-
physics cannot be overcome, even with ABS.
cle. This system prevents the wheels from locking ing, the brake pressure is adjusted automatically
The risk of accidents due to inappropriate
in a panic stop on almost all road surfaces. until the wheel no longer slips.
speed cannot be reduced, even by the ABS.
The driver bears the responsibility for all If braking forces approach the wheel lock-up point
With the ABS system in your vehicle, the driving maneuvers. for all wheels (panic braking) the ABS system will
following areas are enhanced: intervene to provide a rapid rythmic braking. The
f Adapt your driving style to the prevailing road
Steering, vehicle remains steerable under all proper operation of ABS is perceived by the driver
and weather conditions.
braking forces when ABS is engaged. as a pulsating brake pedal in conjunction with au-
f Obey all traffic laws. dible noise and perhaps some vibration.
Good directional control, no swerving caused
by locking of wheels under braking conditions. Other vehicles not equipped with the ABS f If you experience these sensations while driv-
system may not be able to maintain control, ing or a road surface with questionable trac-
Shorter stopping distance, stopping distances
especially on wet or poor road surfaces and tion, reduce vehicle speed appropriate for the
are usually reduced because controlled braking is
thus may be more likely to impact you from prevailing road conditions.
maximized.
behind.
f If full braking should be necessary, press the
Prevention of wheel lock up, no brake- induced
f To minimize that risk, use your ABS system to brake pedal all the way down throughout the
sliding and thus no localized tire wear from emer-
increase your ability to maneuver to avoid dan- entire braking procedure, regardless of the pul-
gency braking.
gerous situations and not merely to try to stop sating pedal. Do not ease up on pressure ap-
The crucial advantage of the ABS system over a in the shortest distance possible. plied to the pedal.
conventional brake system is in the area of main-
The functional readiness of all the main electrical
taining directional control and maneuverability of
components of the ABS is checked by an
the car in emergency situations.
electronic monitoring system both before and
while you drive.

Operation, Safety 59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning light USA Warning! Clutch Pedal
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death. The clutch pedal must be depressed fully
Warning light Canada The control unit of the ABS brake system is before the starter will engage.
set for standard tire size. If non-standard
When the ignition is switched on the ABS warning tires are installed, the control unit may mis- Warning!
light will light up while the system is electronically interpret the speed of the vehicle, because of Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
interrogated and goes out when the engine is the variant data it receives from the sensors sonal injury or death.
started if the check is not yet complete. on the axles.
If the ABS warning lamp fails to go out, this indi- f Always check the movement of the clutch ped-
cates that ABS has been deactivated due to a f Use only tire makes and types tested by al before driving and make sure that it is not
fault. If the warning lights in the instrument panel Porsche. obstructed by a floor mat or any other object.
and on-board computer light up while you are driv-
f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding
ing, this indicates that a fault has occurred. In both
into positions that could interfere with the safe
cases, normal braking, as in vehicles without ABS,
operation of your vehicle.
is still retained.
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you
The ABS system should, however, be examined at nonskid floor mats of the correct size.
an authorized Porsche dealer immediately to pre-
To avoid damage to the clutch and transmis-
vent the occurrence of further faults.
sion:
f If the ABS system becomes inoperative, take
f Always depress the clutch pedal fully when
your vehicle to your authorized Porsche dealer
changing gears.
immediately.
f Do not hold the car on a steep grade with the
clutch pedal partially depressed.

Should the free travel of the clutch pedal suddenly

become larger, it could mean a malfunction of the
clutch.
f See your Porsche dealer for correction.

60 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sport Mode selection mode for vehicles with PDK transmis-
sion).
A sportier car set-up is obtained when Sport mode
f Please observe the chapters on PSM, PASM
is switched on. Interventions by the Porsche
and PDK.
control systems are intentionally shifted towards
greater agility and driving performance:
Switching Sport mode on and off
– PASM (Porsche Active Suspension Manage-
ment) is automatically changed to Sport mode, Switching Sport mode on and off simultaneously
resulting in a stiffer suspension setup. activates and deactivates the Sport mode in
– When Sport mode is active, the PDK transmis- PASM.
sion switches to a sporty gear-changing map If PASM Sport mode was activated with the PASM
and shortens the gear shifting times. Gear button, PASM remains active.
changes take place faster, but fuel consump- After the ignition is switched off, Sport mode is
tion is also increased. automatically reset to Normal mode.
PSM (Porsche Stability Management) control
gives a sportier road-feel to the vehicle. PSM SPORT button
interventions take place later than in Normal
f Press SPORT button A in the center console. SPORT PLUS button
mode. The driver can maneuver the vehicle
When Sport mode is switched on, the light- (only on vehicles with PDK transmission)
with greater agility at its performance limits,
emitting diode in the SPORT button is lit.
without having to dispense with the assistance In “Sport Plus” mode, the PDK transmission
of PSM in emergency situations. This helps to A sporty gear-changing map is enabled and the changes to a shift program designed for driving
achieve optimal lap times, particularly on race gear shifting times are shortened for the PDK on race circuits. 7th gear is not selected.
circuits with a dry road surface. transmission. The gear-changing performance is enhanced
A sporty driving style is recognized more quickly significantly again compared with “Sport” mode.
– The electronic accelerator pedal reacts
and the gear-changing speeds are adapted to
sooner, and the engine is more responsive to
driving performance. f Please see the chapter “SPORT MODE
throttle inputs. When Sport mode is switched (“SPORT” AND “SPORT PLUS” MODES)” on
on, this function is activated only after the Deceleration downshifts are commenced earlier. Page 176.
driver has floored the accelerator pedal or Downshifts are made during slight decelerations,
released it briefly. even at higher engine speeds. f Press SPORT PLUS button B in the center
console.
– The rpm limiter characteristic is “harder”, i.e. f Please see the chapter “SPORT MODE When Sport mode is switched on, the light-
the engine is immediately throttled when the (“SPORT” AND “SPORT PLUS” MODES)” on emitting diode in the SPORT PLUS button is lit.
performance limits are reached (only in manual Page 176.

Operation, Safety 61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 When mode “Sport” is switched on, the logo When mode “Sport Plus” is switched on, the logo
SPORT appears next to the digital speedometer. SPORT PLUS appears next to the digital
speedometer.

62 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Porsche Stability Management PSM uses these values to determine the direction Examples of PSM control operations
of travel indicated by the driver.
(PSM) PSM intervenes and helps to correct the course if – If the front wheels of the vehicle drift on a
PSM is an active control system for stabilization of the actual direction of motion deviates from the bend, the rear wheel on the inside of the bend
the vehicle approaching the performance limits of chosen course (steering-wheel position): is braked and the engine power is reduced if
driving maneuvers. It brakes individual wheels as needed. In addition, necessary.
the engine power may be manipulated in order to
– If the rear of the vehicle swings out on a bend,
Warning! stabilize the vehicle.
the front wheel on the outside of the bend is
The events below inform the driver of PSM control braked.
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death. operations and warn him/her to adapt his/her
The increased control that is provided should driving style to the road conditions: Additional braking functions
not induce you to take greater risks with your – The multifunctional information light on the
safety. The limits dictated by the laws of instrument panel flashes. – Pre-filling the brake system:
physics cannot be overcome, even with PSM. The brake system is prepared for possible
The risk of accidents due to inappropriate – Hydraulic noises can be heard. subsequent emergency braking if the acceler-
speed cannot be reduced, even by PSM. – The vehicle decelerates and steering-wheel ator pedal is released suddenly and quickly.
The driver bears the responsibility for all forces are altered as the PSM controls the The brake system is prefilled and the brake
driving maneuvers. brakes. pads are already applied gently to the brake
discs.
f Adapt your driving style to the prevailing road – Reduced engine power.
and weather conditions. – Brake booster:
– The brake pedal pulsates and its position is In the event of an emergency braking operation
f Obey all traffic laws. changed during braking. where the pedal force is insufficient, a brake
In order to achieve full vehicle deceleration, booster provides the braking pressure neces-
Sensors at the wheels, brakes, steering system foot pressure must be increased after the sary for maximum deceleration at all 4 wheels.
and engine continuously measure: brake pedal has begun vibrating.
– Speed Advantages of PSM
– Direction of travel (steering angle) – Best possible traction and lane-holding ability
– Lateral acceleration in all driving situations – even on road surfaces
with varying friction.
– Rate of turn about the vertical axis
– Longitudinal acceleration

Operation, Safety 63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 – The system compensates for undesired lateral The following functions stabilize the vehicle in
vehicle reactions when the driver releases the emergency situations, even with PSM switched
accelerator pedal or brakes when cornering. off:
This compensation functions up to the
– When PSM is off, the vehicle is stabilized as
maximum lateral acceleration.
soon as one of the two front wheels enters the
– PSM actively stabilizes the vehicle as required ABS control range.
during dynamic driving maneuvers (e.g. rapid
– When PSM is off and Sport mode is on, the
steering movements, during lane changes or
vehicle is stabilized as soon as both front
on alternating bends).
wheels enter the ABS control range.
– Improved braking stability on bends and on
One-sided spinning of the wheels is prevented,
different or varying road surfaces.
even with PSM switched off.
– It improves braking function and shortens
stopping distance in the event of emergency Switching PSM back on
braking.
f Press PSM OFF button.
Readiness for operation PSM is switched on after a short delay.
Switching off PSM The light-emitting diode in the button and the
PSM is switched on automatically every time you PSM multifunctional light on the instrument
start the engine. f Press PSM OFF button. panel go out.
PSM is switched off after a short delay. The on-board computer shows a message.
PSM should always be switched on during
“normal” driving. The light-emitting diode in the button is lit up.
When the PSM is switched off, the PSM multi-
However, it may be advantageous to switch off functional light on the instrument panel is lit
PSM temporarily in exceptional situations, for and a message is shown on the on-board
example: computer.
– On a loose surface or in deep snow, An acoustic signal also sounds.

– When “rocking” the vehicle free and Note

– When using snow chains. When PSM is switched off, the additional braking
functions are deactivated. Automatic reactivation
in emergency situations is linked to the PSM
control.

64 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sport mode f Please have the fault remedied at an author- Towing
ized Porsche dealer.
A sportier car set-up is obtained when Sport or f Please see the chapter “TOWING” on
f Please see the chapter “PUTTING VEHICLE
Sport Plus mode is switched on. Page 269.
INTO OPERATION” on Page 251.
PSM interventions are later than in Normal mode;
the vehicle can be maneuverd with greater agility Checks on test stands
at its performance limits, without dispensing with
the assistance of PSM in emergency situations. Brake tests
This helps to achieve optimal lap times, particu-
Brake tests must be performed only on plate-type
larly on race circuits and a dry road surface.
test stands or roller test stands.

PSM multifunctional light The ignition must be switched off.

The following limit values must not be exceeded
– The multifunctional light on the instrument
on roller test stands:
panel lights up for a lamp check when the
ignition is switched on. – Testing speed 5 mph (8 km/h)
– The light indicates a control operation by – Test duration 20 seconds
flashing, including when PSM is switched off
(brake control in the event of one-sided wheel Handbrake tests
spin). Handbrake tests on the roller test stand must be
– In conjunction with a message on the on-board performed only with the ignition switched off.
computer, the light indicates that PSM is
switched off.
An acoustic signal also sounds.
– The light indicates a fault in conjunction with a
message on the on-board computer.
PSM is out of order.

Operation, Safety 65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Porsche Active Suspension
Management (PASM)
PASM makes two running-gear setups available to
the driver: “Normal” and “Sport”.
The selection is made via a button on the center
console.
In Normal mode the running gear is in a comfort-
able setup.
Sport mode offers very sporty shock absorber
tuning.
The variable suspension system selects the appro-
priate damping level for each wheel according to
the situation and driving conditions.
Example:
If the vehicle is driven in a very sporty manner in
Normal mode, PASM automatically adapts the Switching on PASM Sport mode
shock-absorber behavior to the driving situation
accordingly. f Press PASM button in the center console.
When PASM Sport mode is switched on, the
light-emitting diode in the button is lit up and a
message is shown on the on-board computer.

Switching off PASM Sport mode

f Press PASM button in the center console.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out
and the on-board computer displays a
message.
After the ignition is switched off, PASM is
automatically reset to Normal mode.

66 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Retractable Spoiler Automatic control Manual control
(automatic mode) (manual mode)
The rear spoiler improves driving stability, espe-
cially at higher speeds. The rear spoiler extends at approx. 75 mph When the ignition is on, the rear spoiler can be
(120 km/h) and retracts again at approx. 50 mph extended and retracted manually using the button
Warning! (80 km/h). in the center console.

Risk of accident, resulting in serious perso- If the automatic control fails, the warning light Note
nal injury or death. lights up.
If the spoiler cannot be extended, driving sta- When the rear spoiler is extended manually, the au-
tomatic control does not operate and the rear
bility will be adversely affected by increased Warning light
rear axle lift, which could lead to loss of con- spoiler must be manually retracted.
trol. The warning light in the on-board computer lights
up when the rear spoiler does not extend over
f Adapt your driving style and speed to the
75 mph (120 km/h) or its end position is not
changed driving conditions.
reached.
f Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Risk of injury during manual retraction or
extension of the spoiler with the vehicle
stationary.
f Make sure that no persons or objects are
within the range of movement of the rear
spoiler.
Risk of damage from pushing the vehicle by
the rear spoiler.
f Do not push the vehicle at the rear spoiler.

Operation, Safety 67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f at speeds between 20 and 60 mph Fixed rear spoiler
(30 and 100 km/h):
Press button briefly. Caution!
The rear spoiler retracts, the light-emitting
diode in the button goes out. Risk of damage to rear spoiler.
The rear spoiler changes to automatic mode. f Please consult the operator before using auto-
f at speeds over 60 mph (100 km/h): matic car washes.
Press button briefly. f Do not push the vehicle by the spoiler.
The rear spoiler remains extended, the light-
emitting diode in the button goes out.
The rear spoiler changes to automatic mode.

Manually retracting an extended rear spoiler

after switching on the ignition again
1. Press button briefly.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
The rear spoiler is now in manual mode.
Extending
2. Press and hold button until the rear spoiler has
f Press button briefly. reached its final position.
The spoiler extends to its final position. The light-emitting diode in the button goes out.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up. The rear spoiler changes to automatic mode.
The rear spoiler remains extended even after
switching off ignition.

Retracting
f at speeds between 0 and 20 mph
(0 and 30 km/h):
Press and hold button until the rear spoiler has
reached its final position.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out.
The rear spoiler changes to automatic mode.

68 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Interior light, footwell lights Orientation light
Switching off The light-emitting diode in the interior light impro-
ves your orientation inside the vehicle when it is
f Press left half of switch.
dark.
Switching to continuous illumination
Note on operation
f Press right half of switch.
On vehicles with Sport Chrono Package Plus, the
Switching on and off automatically brightness of the orientation light can be changed
in PCM.
f Move switch to center position.
f Please see the chapter ”Individual Memory“ in
The lights are switched on when a door is the separate PCM operating instructions.
unlocked or opened or when the ignition key is
withdrawn from the ignition lock.
The lights are switched off with a delay of
approx. 30 seconds after the door is closed.
The lights go out immediately as soon as the igni-
A - Orientation light
B - Interior light switch, footwell light
tion key is inserted in the ignition lock or the vehic-
le is locked.
Interior lights
f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF AF-
TER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 246.

Operation, Safety 69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Parking Aids Note
The sensors must always be kept free of dirt, ice
Parking assistant and snow in order to ensure that they are fully
functional.
When the driver backs up, the parking assistant
system indicates the distance between the car Caution!
and a large obstacle behind it, by means of signal
To avoid damaging the sensors:
tones.
f Maintain sufficient distance when cleaning with
Warning! steam-jet units.
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
Parking assistant cannot detect small ob- Signal tones/function
jects such as children and pets. When reverse gear is selected, the parking
Despite use of the parking assistant system, assistant confirms that it is switched on by issuing
the driver is still responsible for taking due a short signal tone.
care and assessing obstacles when backing A detected obstacle is signalled by an intermit-
up. tent tone. The intervals decrease as the obstacle
Ultrasound sensors
f Make sure that no persons, especially small is approached.
children, animals or obstacles are within the A continuous tone sounds when the distance
Sensors
maneuvering area. becomes less than one foot. This continuous tone
Four ultrasound sensors in the rear bumper meas- can stop if the obstacle is approached closer than
The parking assistant system is activated auto- ure the distance to the closest obstacle. one foot.
matically when reverse gear is selected and the ig- The radio volume should not be so loud as to
– Range middle sensors around 60 in./150 cm
nition is on. drown out the signal tones.
– Range outer sensors around 24 in./60 cm
Note
Obstacles cannot be detected in the “blind” sen-
Be aware that the parking assistant system is sor area (e.g. near the ground).
not switched on if the car rolls backward without
reverse gear being engaged.

70 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Limits of ultrasonic measurement Preconditions
The parking assistant system cannot detect: – Vehicle must be equipped with seat memory.
– sound-absorbing obstacles (e.g. powder – Set the control switch A to “passenger’s side”.
snow),
– Reverse gear must be engaged.
– sound-reflecting obstacles (e.g. glass surfac-
es, flat painted surfaces) Returning mirror glass to its original position

– and very thin obstacles. f Drive forwards with a speed of over 4 mph
(6 km/h) or
– Other ultrasound sources (e.g. pneumatic
brakes of other vehicles, jackhammers) can f Set the control switch A to “driver’s side”.
interfere with detection of obstacles.

Fault indication
The parking assistant system indicates a fault in
two ways:
– After reverse gear has been selected, the
short signal tone is followed by a continuous A - Control switch for door mirror adjustment
tone of the same pitch:
This indicates that sensors are soiled or cov- Swivelling down mirror glass as a parking
ered with ice. aid
– After reverse gear has been selected, the f Please see the chapter “SEAT MEMORY” on
short signal tone is followed by a continuous Page 35.
tone with a much lower pitch:
This indicates a general system fault. – When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
Please have the fault remedied at an author- glass on the passenger’s side swivels down
ized Porsche dealer. slightly to show the curb area.

Operation, Safety 71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f Please see the chapter “KEY WITH RADIO RE- Switch position 1
MOTE CONTROL” on Page 16.
Ignition on
Before starting the engine f Turn ignition key to position 1.
Ignition is switched on.
f Apply the footbrake.
f Manual transmission: Note on operation
Fully depress the clutch pedal and put the gear- All electrical equipment can be switched on.
shift lever into neutral.
f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
The clutch pedal must be depressed fully
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
before the starter will engage.
COMPUTER” on Page 162.
f In vehicles with PDK transmission:
Move PDK selector lever to position P or N.
f Do not press the accelerator pedal.

Switch position 0
O - Initial position
1 - Ignition on Initial position
2 - Start engine
3 - Ignition off The ignition key cannot be withdrawn when the
ignition is switched on or when the engine has
been started.
Ignition/Starter Switch with To withdraw the ignition key:
anti-theft Steering Lock
f Stop the vehicle.
The ignition lock has a total of four ignition lock po-
f In vehicles with PDK transmission:
sitions.
Move PDK selector lever to position P.
The ignition key rebounds to the initial position
from every ignition lock position. f Switch ignition off.
f For your safety, fasten safety belts. f Remove ignition key.
f Please see the chapter “IMMOBILIZER” on
Page 15.

72 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Switch position 2 Locking the steering column Automatic unlocking
The steering column is unlocked when the vehicle
Start engine Automatic locking
is unlocked with the radio remote control.
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2. The steering column is automatically locked when
the ignition key is withdrawn from the ignition lock. Note
f Please see the chapter “STARTING PROCEDU-
RES” on Page 75. f To avoid discharging the battery, always re-
Warning! move the ignition key from the ignition lock.
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per- Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on
Switch position 3
sonal injury or death. Page 249.
Ignition off The steering wheel will lock and will cause
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 3.
loss of steering. Gong
f Never remove key from the ignition lock or turn If you leave the key in the ignition/steering lock, a
Note on operation the key off while the vehicle is moving. gong will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
The vehicle battery discharges if the ignition key is f Always withdraw the ignition key when This is a reminder to remove the key.
left inserted. leaving the vehicle.
If the vehicle battery is dead, the key can only be
pulled out of the ignition lock if the emergency
operation is performed:
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY OPERA-
TION – PULLING OUT THE IGNITION KEY” on
Page 74.

Operation, Safety 73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emergency operation – pulling out the 3. Use metal hook A to remove the plastic lid B 4. Turn ignition key counter-clockwise as far as it
ignition key from the ignition lock. Make sure that plastic lid will go.
B is not lost.
5. Press metal hook A into opening C.
If the vehicle battery is dead, the key can be pulled
An unlocking sound will be heard.
out only if the emergency operation is performed.
6. Turn the ignition key to initial position (0) and
1. Grasp the fuse box cover at the finger hole and
remove.
pull it off.
7. Re-fit the plastic lid B.
2. Unclip metal hook A on the inside of the cover.

74 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Starting Procedures Starting the engine prolonged periods with the engine on and the
car not moving.
f Please see the chapter “IMMOBILIZER” on f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2.
An unattended vehicle with a running engine
Page 15.
f As soon as the engine starts, release the igni- is potentially hazardous.
f Please see the chapter “EMISSION CONTROL tion key. If warning lights should come on to indicate
SYSTEM” on Page 208. improper operation, they would go unno-
The first operation of the starter is ended automat-
ticed.
ically when the engine starts.
Warning! If the engine does not start, subsequent starter f Never leave the engine idling unattended.
Serious injury or death may result if you are operations will not be ended automatically.
Danger of fire.
involved in a collision without having fas- If the engine fails to start after 10 or 15 seconds
tened the safety belts. f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
of cranking:
where the hot exhaust system may come in
f Fasten safety belts before driving away. f Wait about 10 seconds before engaging the contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or oth-
starter again. er flammable material.
Before starting the engine f When starting the engine, be ready to drive f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
immediately. the fire department.
f Apply the footbrake. Drive vehicle at moderate speeds and avoid Do not endanger your life by attempting to put
f Manual transmission: engine speeds above 4,200 rpm during the out the fire.
Fully depress the clutch pedal and put the gear- first 5 minutes.
Risk of burn injury when standing near or coming
shift lever into neutral. f Do not let the engine idle to warm up. into contact with the exhaust pipe.
The clutch pedal must be depressed fully
before the starter will engage. The exhaust pipe is hot when the vehicle is running
Danger!
and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is
f In vehicles with PDK transmission: Engine exhaust fumes have many compo- turned off.
Move PDK selector lever to position P or N. nents which you can smell. They also contain f To prevent injury, make a point of noting where
Temperature sensors on the engine automatically carbon monoxide (CO), which is a colorless your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing
provide the correct fuel/air mixture required for and odorless gas. your legs near the exhaust pipe, and closely
starting. Carbon monoxide can cause unconscious- supervise children around the vehicle when the
Therefore, it is not necessary to depress the ness and even death if inhaled. exhaust pipe could be hot.
accelerator pedal while starting a cold or a f Never start or let the engine run in an A hot exhaust pipe can cause serious burns.
warm engine. enclosed, unventilated area.
It is not recommended to sit in your car for

Operation, Safety 75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Stopping Engine Risk of burn injury when standing near or Risk of injury. The radiator fans in the front
coming into contact with the exhaust pipe. end of the car may be operating or
f Turn key back to position 3. unexpectedly start operating when the
The exhaust pipe is hot when the vehicle is running
engine is switched on.
f Do not stop engine immediately after hard or and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is
extended driving. turned off. f Carry out work in these areas only with the en-
Keep engine running at increased idle for gine switched off.
f To prevent injury, make a point of noting where
about two minutes to prevent excessive heat
your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing
build-up before turning off engine.
your legs near the exhaust pipe, and closely Automatic garage door
f To avoid discharging the battery, always re- supervise children around the vehicle when the
move the ignition key from the ignition lock. exhaust pipe could be hot. The ignition system in your Porsche may interfere
A hot exhaust pipe can cause serious burns.
f When leaving the car, always remove the igniti- with your electronically operated garage door.
on key, apply the parking brake and engage f To check this, drive your Porsche close to the
1st gear or reverse gear on vehicles with ma- Engine-compartment blower, garage door. Make sure not to interfere with
nual transmission or move the selector lever to radiator fan the operating range of the door.
position P on vehicles with PDK transmission.
f Run the engine at different speeds.
f Engage the steering lock by moving the steer- The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of
ing wheel to the left or right. the car. f If the garage door opens or closes without you
Turn the steering wheel to the locking position The engine-compartment blower is mounted in the operating the garage door unit in your car,
before you switch off the engine so that you engine compartment. contact the dealer who installed the automatic
don’t have to exert yourself when locking or garage door to have the frequency and/or
unlocking the steering. Warning! coding of the garage door signal changed or
modified.
Risk of injury.
Warning! After the engine is switched off, the engine-
Danger of injury. Hot engine compartment compartment temperature is monitored for
components can burn skin on contact. approx. 30 minutes.
During this period, and depending on tem-
f Before working on any part in the engine perature, the engine-compartment blower
compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool may continue to run or start to run.
down sufficiently.
f Carry out work in these areas only with the en-
gine off, the ignition off, and exercise extreme
caution.

76 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
f Whenever stalled or stopped for emergency re-
pairs, move the car well off the road. Switch on
the emergency flasher and mark the car with
road flares or other warning devices.
f Do not remain in the car. Someone approach-
ing from the rear may not realize your vehicle
is stopped and cause a collision.
Danger of fire.
f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
where the hot exhaust system may come in
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or
other flammable material.

Emergency Flasher Switch Hot engine compartment components can

burn skin on contact.
Operational readiness of the emergency flasher
f Before working on any part in the engine
does not depend on the ignition lock and turn sig-
compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool
nal lever position.
down sufficiently.
f If your car is disabled or parked under emer-
gency conditions switch on the emergency
flasher in the dashboard.
All turn signals and the indicator light in the
switch flash with the same frequency.

Operation, Safety 77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Daytime driving lights
Parking lights, side marker lights,
license plate light, instrument illumina- The daytime driving lights are integrated in the
tion, daytime driving lights switched off front auxiliary headlights. These lights are
Canada: daytime driving lights switched switched on only when the engine is running and
on with the light switch in the positions OFF or HOME.
Low beam headlights must be switched on when
Low beam, high beam
driving through tunnels or at dusk, for example.
Only with ignition on,
daytime driving lights switched off Operation of the daytime driving lights may vary
depending on country-specific regulations.
Rear fog light Canada only:
Pull switch to second click. In addition to the auxiliary headlights the parking
Indicator light on. lights are switched on.
USA only:
Warning chime The daytime driving lights can be deactivated in
the on-board computer.
If the ignition key is withdrawn and the door is
opened while the lights (not the Welcome Home f Please see the chapter “ON-BOARD
lighting) are on, a chime warns of possible bat- COMPUTER (BC)” on Page 130.
Light Switch on Vehicles with tery discharge.
Bi-Xenon Headlights Vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus
In some countries, differences are possible Further individual light functions are available in ve-
Lights switched off due to provisions of law. hicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus.
Daytime driving lights are switched on f Please observe the chapter “Individual Memo-
when the engine is running. ry” in the separate PCM operating instructions.
Welcome Home Function
Daytime driving lights are switched on Cornering light
when the engine is running.
The dynamic cornering light is activated above
speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h).

78 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic Headlight Beam Adjustment Welcome Home Lighting
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights feature Switching on
dynamic headlight beam adjustment.
f Move light switch to the HOME position.
When the ignition is switched on, the level of the
For improved visibility and security when you get
headlight beam automatically changes in accord-
in and out of the car, the daytime driving lights and
ance with the vehicle load.
the tail lights remain on for a certain period of
The level of the headlight beam is automatically
time:
kept constant during acceleration and braking.
– When you get out of the car, the lights are
Checking operation turned on for approx. 30 seconds after the
1. Switch the low beam on. door is opened. The off-delay time resumes
when the vehicle is locked.
2. Insert ignition key and switch ignition on. On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package
The light beam first dips all the way down and Plus, the PCM can be used to set the off-delay
is then adapted to the vehicle load. time. This setting also changes the lighting
If this test item is not met, the headlight beam period for unlocking the vehicle.
adjustment system must be checked by an author- Please observe the chapter “Individual
ized Porsche dealer. Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.
– The lights are turned on for approx.
30 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked.
The lights go out if the ignition is switched on
or when leaving the Welcome Home lighting.

Operation, Safety 79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Daytime driving lights
Fog light in addition to parking lights or
low beam USA only:
Pull switch to first click. The daytime driving lights can be activated/deacti-
Indicator light on. vated in the on-board computer.
f Please see the chapter “ON-BOARD
Rear fog light in addition to fog lights COMPUTER (BC)” on Page 130.
Pull switch to second click.
Indicator light on. Welcome Home Lighting
Warning chime Switching on
If the ignition key is withdrawn and the door is f Move light switch to the HOME position.
opened while the lights (not the Welcome Home
For improved visibility and security when you get
lighting) are on, a chime warns of possible bat-
in and out of the car, the fog lights and the tail
tery discharge.
lights remain on for a certain period of time:
In some countries, differences are possible – When you get out of the car, the lights are
due to provisions of law. turned on for approx. 30 seconds after the
door is opened. The off-delay time resumes
Vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus when the vehicle is locked.
Light Switch on Vehicles with Further individual light functions are available in ve- On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package
Halogen Headlights hicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus. Plus, the PCM can be used to set the off-delay
time. This setting also changes the lighting
Lights switched off f Please observe the chapter “Individual period for unlocking the vehicle.
Memory” in the separate PCM operating Please observe the chapter “Individual
Welcome Home Function instructions. Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.
Parking lights, side marker lights,
license plate light, instrument illumination – The lights are turned on for approx.
30 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked.
Low beam, high beam
The lights go out if the ignition is switched on
Only with ignition on or when leaving the Welcome Home lighting.

80 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The turn signal lever turns off automatically when Individual Light Functions
the steering wheel is straightened out after com-
pleting a turn. Further individual light functions are available in
vehicles with Sport Chrono Plus package.
Lane changer f Please refer to the chapter ”Individual Memory“
in the separate PCM operating instructions.
f To indicate your intention when changing lanes
on the freeway, slightly lift or depress the lever
to the resistance point.
The lever will return to the OFF position when
released.
f If the frequency of the display becomes notice-
ably faster, check the operation of the turn sig-
nal bulbs.

Headlight flasher

Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer / (With ignition on or off)

Parking light / Flasher Lever f To flash the headlights to oncomming motor-
ists, slightly pull the lever toward the steering
Turn signals, low beam and high beam are ready wheel and then release it.
for operation when the ignition is on. The blue indicator light in the tachometer will
1 – Turn signal left go on/off as you pull/release the lever.
2 – Turn signal right
Push the lever to the upper or lower pressure Parking light
point – turn signals flash three times
The parking light can only be switched on when
3 – High beam
the ignition is switched off.
4 – Headlight flasher
Lever in center position – Low beam f Move the lever up or down to switch on the
right or left parking light.
When high beam and headlight flasher are select-
ed, the blue indicator light in the tachometer is lit.

Operation, Safety 81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Windshield Wiper/ Washer Lever 4 – Windshield wiper – one-touch operation:
f Move wiper lever downwards. The windshield
Warning! wipers wipe once.

Danger of injury when the windshield wipers 5 – Windshield wipers and washer system:
operate unintentionally, e.g. in intermittent f Pull wiper lever towards the steering wheel.
or rain sensor operation. The washer system sprays and wipes while the
Risk of damage to the windshield, wiper sys- lever is pulled towards the steering wheel.
tem and headlight washer. When the wiper lever is released, a few drying
wipes are executed.
f Avoid running the wiper blades over a dry
windshield to prevent scratching the glass. A - Headlight washer (Vehicles with Bi-Xenon
Spray washer fluid on the windshield first. headlights):
A scratched windshield will reduce visibility. The washer sprays only while low beam or high
f Always loosen wiper blades from frozen glass beam is switched on.
before operating wipers to prevent damage to f Briefly push button A to operate headlight
the wiper motor or blades. washer system.
f Always switch off windshield wipers in car f If heavily soiled, repeat wash.
wash to prevent them wiping unintentionally Wiper and headlight washer system
(intermittent or sensor operation). The headlight washer system automatically sprays
0 – Windshield wipers off once for every ten times the front windshield
f Always switch off windshield wipers before 1 – Intermittent/rain sensor operation for washer system is operated.
cleaning the windshield to avoid unintentional front windshield wipers
operation (intermittent or sensor operation). f Move wiper lever upwards to the first click. Note
f Do not operate the headlight washer in car Please see the chapter “RAIN SENSOR” on
The windshield washer nozzles are heated
washes. Page 83.
when the ignition is on, as a precaution against
f Do not operate headlight washer when it is 2 – Windshield wipers slow freezing.
frozen. f Move wiper lever upwards to the second click.
3 – Windshield wipers fast
f Move wiper lever upwards to the third click.

82 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Rain sensor Changing the sensitivity of the rain sensor
Sensitivity can be set with switch A in 4 stages:
In vehicles with a rain sensor the amount of rainfall
(snowfall too) which has settled on the windshield f Adjust switch A upwards –
is measured. Wiper speed is automatically adjus- high sensitivity.
ted accordingly. The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the
windshield.
Switching on
f Adjust switch A downwards –
f Move wiper lever upwards to the first click. low sensitivity.

Switching off Maintenance note

f Move wiper lever to position 0. f Periodically clean the wiper blades with a win-
The rain sensor remains switched off if the wiper dow cleaner, especially after the vehicle has
lever is already in position 1 when the ignition is been washed in a car wash. We recommend
switched on. Porsche window cleaner. If they are very dirty
(e.g. with insect remains), they can be cleaned
To switch the rain sensor on again: with a sponge or cloth.
Wipe interval control f Move wiper lever to position 0 and then to If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this may be as
position 1 or a result of the following:
On vehicles without a rain sensor, the wiping
intervals can be adjusted in four steps. f Operate windshield washer system 5 or If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash,
f Change the sensitivity of the rain sensor with wax residues may be adhering to the windshield.
Decreasing intervals four-stage switch A. These wax residues can only be removed by using
a window cleaner concentrate.
f Adjust switch A upwards. Switch-on is confirmed by one wipe of the wind-
The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the shield. f Please see the chapter “WASHER FLUID” on
windshield. Page 210.
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus,
Increasing intervals further rain sensor functions can be selected via f Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer
the PCM. for further information.
f Adjust switch A downwards.
f Please see the chapter ”Individual Memory“ in The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
the separate PCM operating instructions. f Replace wiper blades as soon as possible.

Operation, Safety 83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vehicles with PDK Hold and store speed
Downshifts are carried out to help maintain the
f Bring the car to the desired speed with the
pre-selected speed (especially when driving down-
accelerator.
hill).
f Then briefly push the operating lever forward
Warning! (position 1).
Risk of an accident resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death. A constant speed may Accelerating (e.g. to overtake)
not be safe in heavy traffic, or on winding or
Option 1
slippery roads.
With the speed control system engaged, the f Increase the speed as usual with the
engine speed will not return to idle when re- accelerator.
moving the foot from the accelerator pedal. When you ease off the accelerator, the
previously saved value is set again.
f Do not use the speed control when it may be
unsafe to keep the car at a constant speed. Option 2
f Observe all local and national speed limits. f Push operating lever forward (position 1) until
A- Automatic speed control readiness off/on the desired speed is reached.
1- +SPEED/SET (accelerate/store)
The speed reached is maintained and stored
2- –SPEED (decelerate) Switch automatic speed control when the lever is released.
3- OFF (interrupt) readiness on
4- RESUME
Option 3
f Press button A on the automatic speed control
Automatic Speed Control lever. f Push lever slightly forwards (position 1)
(a maximum of 10 times).
The automatic speed control maintains any This green indicator light in the
The speed is increased by 1 mph (1.6 km/h),
selected speed between 15 mph and 145 mph speedometer now indicates readiness
each time the lever is pushed forwards.
(30 km/h and 240 km/h) without you having to
use the accelerator pedal. Note on operation
The automatic speed control is operated with the
lever on the steering wheel. Speed control operation is automatically interrupt-
ed if the speed is increased by more than approx.
16 mph (25 km/h ) for longer than 20 seconds.

84 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Decelerating Interrupting automatic speed control Resuming the stored speed
operation
Option 1 f Briefly push operating lever upwards
f Pull operating lever downwards briefly (position 4).
f Pull operating lever towards the steering wheel
(position 3) or The speed control accelerates/decelerates
(position 2) until the desired speed is reached.
the vehicle to the stored speed.
The speed reached is maintained and stored f Operate brake or clutch pedal or
when the lever is released. The stored speed should only be recalled when
f Switch PDK to selector lever position N.
traffic conditions and the road surface so permit.
Option 2 f Please see the chapter “PORSCHE DOPPEL-
f Briefly move lever towards the steering wheel KUPPLUNG (PDK)” on Page 174. Switching automatic speed control
(position 2) (a maximum of 10 times). The speed driven before the interruption remains readiness off
The speed is reduced by 1 mph (1.6 km/h), stored in the memory.
each time the lever is moved towards the f Press button A on the automatic speed control
steering wheel. Automatic speed control operation is lever.
interrupted automatically: The green readiness light in the speedometer
Vehicles with PDK goes off.
– If the set vehicle speed is exceeded by more
Downshifts are carried out to improve decelera- than approx. 16 mph (25 km/h) for longer than Note
tion (especially when driving downhill). 20 seconds.
The stored speed value is cleared when the
– If the actual vehicle speed falls to approx. vehicle is parked and the ignition is switched off.
37 mph (60 km/h) below the set vehicle speed
for longer than 60 seconds (upward slopes). Important note
– For PSM control operations. On upward or downward slopes, the set speed
cannot always be maintained by the automatic
speed control.
f To obtain sufficient engine braking or a better
engine-speed range, a lower gear needs to be
selected.

Operation, Safety 85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cupholder
(holder for drink cans and cups)
f Keep the cupholder closed while driving.

Warning!
Risk of scalding or damage due to spilling
drinks.
f Only use beverage containers which fit.
f Never put overfull containers in the cupholder.
f Never place hot drinks in the cupholder.

Extending cupholder f Press the symbol for the respective cupholder.

The cupholder extends out.
f Press the panel.
f Close panel in the middle.
The panel opens.
The cupholder diameter can be increased by pull-
ing it out to hold larger containers.

86 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emptying
f Open ashtray and carefully pull out ash insert.
f Leave ashtray lid open.
Push in ash insert.

Warning!
Danger of fire.
f Never use ashtray for waste paper disposal,
as it could pose a fire hazard.

Pulling cupholder out Ashtray

f Pull out holder (arrow).
Opening
f Insert container.
f Open ashtray lid.
f Carefully slide holder inwards to adjust it to the
container size.

Closing cupholder
f Push cupholder drawer in.
f Open panel in the middle.
f Close and engage the cupholder.
f Close panel in the middle.

Operation, Safety 87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Heating lighter
f Open ashtray lid.
f Push in knob of the cigarette lighter.
When ready for use, the lighter will snap back.

Note on operation
The lighter receptacle is not to be used for
electrical accessories (except for the tire filling
compressor).
Maximum power consumption: 150 W
f Please see the chapter “SOCKETS” on
Page 245.

Danger! Cigarette Lighter

Danger of fire in engine compartment due to Warning!
burning cigars or cigarettes.
Serious personal injury or death could result Danger of fire and burning.
from fire in the engine compartment. The cigarette lighter is ready for use, regard-
less of the ignition lock position.
f Do not throw any lit cigars or cigarettes out of
the vehicle. f Never leave unsupervised children in the car.
They can be blown into the air inlets A by the f Never touch the heating element or sides of
air flow and cause a fire in the engine compart- the lighter.
ment.
f Hold the lighter by the knob only.

88 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Storage in the Passenger Additional storage possibilities
Compartment – in the doors,

Warning! – in the door sill next to the passenger’s seat,

Unsecured luggage and heavy objects may – in the center console,

come loose during braking, rapid directional – storage tray with coin holder between seats,
changes or in an accident and cause serious
personal injury or death. – glove compartment with CD and pen holder,

f Do not transport any heavy objects in the – clothes hook on back of seat backrests
storage trays. (depending on vehicle equipment),

f Do not carry unsecured luggage or objects in – on engine compartment lid.

the passenger compartment.

Storage tray between the seats

Opening
f Press release button and lift the lid.
There is a coin holder in the forward part of the
storage tray.
f Please see the chapter “SOCKETS” on
Page 245.

Operation, Safety 89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Glove compartment
Warning!
Risk of injury by the glove compartment lid in
case of an accident.
f Keep the glove compartment closed while
driving.

Opening CD holder
f Pull the catch and open the lid.
Occupied drawers are indicated by a red window.
Locking
Opening drawers
f Lock the catch to secure the contents against
unauthorized access. f Push the button of the drawer you wish to
open.

Closing drawers
f Fold up CD drawer and close until it engages.

Pen holder
A pen can be clipped in on the right side of the CD
holder.

90 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Luggage Storage on Engine
Compartment Lid
Warning!
Unsecured luggage and heavy objects may
come loose during braking, rapid directional
changes or in an accident and cause serious
personal injury or death.
f Do not carry items of luggage or objects in the
passenger compartment unsecured.
f Do not transport any heavy objects in the
oddments trays.
f Keep shutters of the storage box closed while
driving.
Risk of damage.
Storage box
f Items of luggage or objects must neither
hinder convertible top movement nor be in Opening center storage tray
contact with the convertible top or rear window
in such a way as to cause abrasion damage. Move both shutters in the direction indicated by
the arrows.

Operation, Safety 91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The luggage compartment lid can also be un-
locked with the radio remote control.
f Please see the chapter “KEYS” on Page 15.

Important Note
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the front lug-
gage compartment lid can be opened only by con-
necting an external electrical power source.
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY UNLO-
CKING OF THE FRONT LUGGAGE COMPART-
MENT LID” on Page 248.
or the description inside the fuse box lid.

Warning message
A warning message in the on-board computer
A - Opening front luggage compartment lid comes on if the lids are not completely closed.
B - Opening rear luggage compartment lid
f Fully close the lid.
Luggage Compartment Lids
Unlocking
f Operate the appropriate pull-button next to the
driver’s seat.
The luggage compartment is illuminated when
the respective lid is open.
f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF AF-
TER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 246.

92 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Closing front and rear luggage
compartment lid
f Lower the lid and close it.
f Push the lid closed with the palm of your hand
in the area of the lock.
Check that the lid has correctly engaged in the
lock.

Warning!
Risk of loss of control or an accident, result-
ing in serious personal injury or death.
f Should you notice at any time while driving that
one of the lids is not secured properly, please
stop immediately in a suitable place and close
it.
The front lid may fly up impairing vision.
Opening front luggage compartment lid
Caution!
Risk of damage to luggage compartment lid
or windshield wipers.
f Make sure that the windshield wipers are not
folded out forwards when opening the luggage
compartment lid.

f Raise lid slightly and unlatch the safety catch

with the red lever (arrow).

Operation, Safety 93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Luggage Compartment E- Adapter for security wheel bolts A - Topping up engine oil
F- Tire filling compressor B - Check coolant level, top up if necessary
G- Towing hook
Access covers A and B H- Tool kit
I - Lever for convertible top emergency operation Rear luggage compartment
Caution! (under the tool kit)
J - Tire sealant The refilling points for engine oil and coolant are
Risk of injury or damage. located behind the service flap in the rear luggage
f Open tool box and place it on the floor of the compartment.
f Do not store any objects behind the access
luggage compartment.
covers A and B.
Opening the service flap
Closing
Tool box f Insert tool box into the guide pegs in the lugga- f Open the flap by pulling the handhold.
ge compartment floor. f Please see the chapter “ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
Opening
f Close tool box and lock the turn-locks C. on Page 199.
f Unlock turn-locks C.
f Please see the chapter “COOLANT LEVEL” on
Page 197.

94 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning message
A warning message in the on-board computer
lights up when unlocking handle A is operated.
f Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning
message lights up.
f Check the luggage compartments.
f Close the lid.

Front luggage compartment lid

Function with vehicle stationary
If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with
unlocking the handle, the lid can be opened from
the inside immediately.
Front luggage compartment Rear luggage compartment Function with vehicle in motion
If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with
Trunk Entrapment Note
unlocking the handle when a speed of 2 mph
f When loading the luggage compartment, make
Your vehicle is equipped with an internal front/rear (3 km/h) is exceeded, the warning message in the
sure that items of luggage or other objects
trunk release mechanism. on-board computer lights up.
cannot become caught on the handle.
At the same time, the lid is unlocked and the latch
A person trapped in the luggage compartment This could cause the luggage compartment to
striker pops into the catch-hook position.
can release the lid from the inside using the unlo- open unintentionally.
cking handle.
The handle is fluorescent and glows in the dark.

Operation, Safety 95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Danger! Note
Risk of accident. The front lid cannot be opened from the inside if
If the warning message in the on-board com- the battery is disconnected or empty.
puter lights up when the vehicle is in motion, Safety reasons therefore require that you
the lid may impact in front of the windshield unscrew the latch striker of the front lid lock
and can tear off. if you plan to put the vehicle out of operation
You can lose control of the vehicle, and for an extended period.
serious personal injury or death may result.
f Please consult your authorized Porsche
f Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning dealer.
message lights up. They will advise you about the necessary
measures.
f Check the luggage compartment.
f Close the lid.

Rear luggage compartment lid

If the rear luggage compartment lid is unlocked
with unlocking the handle, the lid opens immedia-
tely.
f Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning
message lights up.
f Check the luggage compartment.
f Close the lid.

96 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Porsche Communication Accessories which have not been tested and Car Audio Operation/Tips
approved by Porsche may impair radio function
Management (PCM) and reception. For radio operation see your radio manual
f Refer to the separate operating instructions which is included with your on-board litera-
before putting the PCM into operation. Navigation ture.

f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF AF-
When put into operation for the first time, a TER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 246.
AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 246. distance of approx. 30 miles (50 km) must be
driven in order for the navigation system to FM reception
Warning! complete the process of fine calibration.
A vehicle is not an ideal place to listen to a radio.
There is a danger of accident if you set or The same applies when the tires are changed (e.g.
Because the vehicle moves, reception conditions
operate the on-board computer, radio, navi- summer/snow tires) or new tires fitted.
are constantly changing.
gation system, telephone or other equipment Full location accuracy is not yet achieved during
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and noise from
when driving. the fine-calibration process.
other vehicles are all working against good recep-
This could distract you from the traffic and If the vehicle has been transported (e.g. ferry, car tion.
cause you to lose control of the vehicle re- train), the system may take a few minutes to deter- Some conditions affecting FM may appear to be
sulting in serious personal injury or death. mine the current location after it has been problems when they are not.
f Operate the components while driving only if switched on.
The following characteristics are completely nor-
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely. Serious tire slip (e.g. spinning wheels on snow) mal for a given reception area, and they do not in-
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting may result in temporarily inaccurate navigation. dicate any problem with the radio itself.
procedures only with the vehicle stationary. When the battery has been disconnected, it may
Note
take up to 15 minutes before the navigation
The reception conditions for the radio module system is operational again. Electronic accessories should only be installed by
integrated in the PCM change continuously as you your authorized Porsche dealer.
drive. Interference from buildings, terrain and the Equipment which has not been tested and ap-
weather is unavoidable. proved by Porsche may impair radio reception.
FM stereo reception is particularly susceptible to
varying reception conditions.
Electronic accessories should only be retrofitted
by your authorized Porsche dealer.

Operation, Safety 97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fading and drifting Station swapping f When not in use, take the disc out of the player,
put the disc back into its case and store it
FM range is limited to about 25 miles (40 km), When two FM stations are close to each other, and
away from dust, heat, damp and direct
except for some high power stations. an electronic dead spot, such as static or multi-
sunlight.
path area, interrupts the original signal, some-
If a vehicle is moving away from the desired sta- Leaving the disc on the dashboard in the sun
times the stronger second signal will be selected
tion’s transmitter, the signal will tend to fade and/ can damage the disc.
automatically until the original one returns.
or drift. This condition is more prevalent with FM
This swapping can also occur as you drive away f If the disc gets dirty, clean the disc by wiping
than AM, and is often accompanied by distortion.
from the selected station and approach another the surfaces from the center to the outside in
Fading and drifting can be minimized to a certain
station of a stronger signal. a radial direction with a soft cloth.
degree by careful attention to fine tuning or selec-
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
tion of a stronger signal.
Compact disc player anti-static record preservative.
Static and fluttering Disc cleaners are available in audio stores.

When the line-of-sight link between a transmitter

and vehicle is blocked by large buildings or moun-
tains, the radio sound may be accompanied with
Caution!
static or fluttering because of the characteristic of
FM. To avoid damage to compact disc player and
In a similar effect, a fluttering noise is sometimes discs.
heard when driving along a tree-lined road.
f Use only compact discs labeled as shown, hav-
This static and fluttering can be reduced by adjust- ing no dirt, damage or warpage.
ing the tone control for greater bass response un-
f Never attempt to disassemble or oil any part
til the disturbance has passed.
of the player unit.
Multipath Do not insert any object other than a disc into
the slot.
Because of the reflecting characteristics of FM, Remember there are no user-serviceable parts
direct and reflected signals may reach the antenna inside the compact disc player.
at the same time (multipath) and cancel each other
out. f Do not allow the disc to sustain any finger-
As a vehicle moves through these electronic dead prints, scrapes or stickers on the surfaces.
spots, the listener may hear a momentary flutter This may cause poor sound quality.
or loss of reception. Hold the disc only on the edge or center hole.

98 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Car Telephone and It is essential to observe the telephone If aftermarket systems are installed by non-dealer-
manufacturer's instructions before operating ship technicians or outside the selling dealer,
Aftermarket Alarms the telephone. problems may result. Installation of aftermarket
equipment is not covered under the New Car War-
Important legal and safety information Any portable telephone or radio transmitter which
ranty.
regarding the use of cellular telephones is used in a Porsche must be properly installed in
Some states may prohibit the use of cellular tele-
accordance with the technical requirements of f Consult your authorized Porsche dealer about
Porsche. the installation of non Porsche approved equip-
phones while driving a vehicle. Check the laws and
regulations on the use of cellular telephones in the ment.
The transmission power must not exceed
areas where you drive. 10 W.
Reception quality
The devices must possess a type approval for
Danger! your vehicle and have an “e” symbol. The reception quality of your car telephone will
change constantly when you are driving. Interfer-
Risk of an accident. If you should require equipment with transmission ence caused by buildings, landscape and weather
Severe personal injury or death can result in power values greater than 10 W, please consult is unavoidable. It may become particularly difficult
the event of an accident. your authorized Porsche dealer for this purpose. to hear when using the hands-free function due to
Looking away from the road or turning your The dealer is familiar with the technical require- external noise such as engine and wind noise.
attention away from your driving can cause ments for installing devices of this kind.
an accident and serious or fatal injury. Automatic car-wash
The antennas for all radios and telephones with a
When using your cellular telephone, you should al- transmitting antenna must be externally mounted. f Unscrew external antennas before using an au-
ways: tomatic car-wash.
The improper installation of radios or telephones
f Give full attention to your driving - pull off the or use of a radio or telephone with a transmitting
road and park before making or answering a antenna inside the car may cause the warning
call if traffic conditions so require; and lights to come on.
f Keep both hands on the steering wheel - use Improper installation of such equipment can cre-
hands-free operation (if available) - pull off the ate a discharged battery or excessive current
road and park before using a hand-held tele- draw from added equipment.
phone.

Operation, Safety 99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Antenna iPod, USB and AUX
f Always unscrew the external antenna before The interfaces for iPod, USB and AUX are located
using an automatic car-wash. in the storage tray between the seats.
f Please refer to the chapter “External Audio
Source” in the separate PCM/CDR operating
instructions.

Note
Do not leave an iPod, USB storage device or an
external audio source in the vehicle for a
prolonged period as extreme ambient conditions
(temperature fluctuations, air humidity) can occur
in the vehicle.

100 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Note
f Pay attention to the final control date on the
fire extinguisher.
If the fire extinguisher is used after its expira-
tion date has elapsed, it may not operate
properly.
f Follow the operating instructions on the fire
extinguisher.
f The functional ability of the fire extinguisher
should be checked by a specialist workshop
every 1-2 years.
f After use, have the fire extinguisher refilled.

Fire Extinguisher Inserting fire extinguisher

In cars equipped with a fire extinguisher, the extin-
1. Place fire extinguisher in the mounting.
guisher is fitted to the front of the driver’s seat.
2. Engage fastening strap lug A in the tension
jack and close tension jack (arrow).
Taking out fire extinguisher
1. Hold fire extinguisher with one hand and press
the PRESS button on the fastening strap with
the other hand (arrow).
2. Remove fire extinguisher from mounting.

Operation, Safety 101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning! Note on operation
Risk of accident when using the HomeLink if f Always use the HomeLink opener in the
persons, animals or objects are within the direction of travel.
range of movement of the equipment that is Otherwise, range restrictions cannot be ruled
being operated. out.
f When using the HomeLink, ensure that no f Before selling the vehicle, delete the
persons, animals or objects are within the programmed signals of the HomeLink.
range of movement of the equipment that is
f Please read the instructions for the original
being operated.
hand-held transmitter to find out whether the
f Observe the safety notes for the original original transmitter is equipped with fixed or
hand-held transmitter. changeable code.
f Always fit new batteries in your hand-held trans-
Preconditions for operating and mitter before programming the transmitter.
programming the HomeLink:
– Ignition is switched on.
1, 2, 3 - Programmable buttons – Daytime driving lights/fog lights are switched
A - Light-emitting diode for status identification off.

HomeLink To operate the respective device:

f Press the appropriate button (1, 2 or 3).
The programmable HomeLink replaces up to three
Light-emitting diode A lights up during signal
original hand-held transmitters used to operate
transfer.
various devices (e.g. garage door, gate to the
property, alarm system).
You can program buttons 1 to 3 with a frequency
of an original handheld transmitter.

102 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Programming HomeLink with fixed code 5. Press the allocated HomeLink button twice.
hand-held transmitters (With some devices, the button to be allocated
must be pressed a third time in order to
1. Press and hold the desired button until the
complete the setting process.)
light-emitting diode begins to flash slowly.
You then have approx. 5 minutes to perform 6. Repeat the programming steps to allocate
steps 2 and 3. other buttons.
2. Hold the original hand-held transmitter approx.
Note
0 to 12 in. (0 to 30 cm) in front of the marked
position (figure) on the vehicle. Several attempts with different distances between
the vehicle and the original hand-held transmitter
3. Press the transmit button on the original hand- might be necessary.
held transmitter until the daytime driving lights
flash three times (up to approx. 45 seconds). The daytime driving lights will flash once the 5
minutes have been exceeded. Programming must
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to allocate other buttons. be repeated from the beginning.
Programming HomeLink with changeable f Please consult your authorized Porsche dealer
code hand-held transmitters if you have not been able to successfully
Allocating signals to the buttons allocate signals for the garage door opener to
1. Press and hold the desired button until the
the buttons even though you have carefully
light-emitting diode begins to flash slowly.
f Please follow the operating instructions for the You then have approx. 5 minutes to perform
followed the instructions in this chapter and
original hand-held transmitter. the operating instructions for the original hand-
steps 2 and 3.
held transmitter.
Prior to programming the HomeLink for the 2. Hold the original hand-held transmitter approx.
first time 0 to 12 in. (0 to 30 cm) in front of the marked Deleting programmed signals of the
position (figure) on the vehicle. HomeLink
The following process deletes the standard codes
set at the factory. Do not repeat the process if you 3. Press the transmit button on the original hand- (e.g., when selling the vehicle)
program further buttons. held transmitter until the daytime driving lights Keep the two outer buttons 1 and 3 depressed
flash three times (up to approx. 45 seconds).
f Keep the two outer buttons 1 and 3 for approx. 20 seconds until light-emitting diode A
depressed for approx. 20 seconds until light- 4. To synchronize the system: begins to flash quickly.
emitting diode A begins to flash quickly. Press the programming button on the receiver All programmed signals of buttons 1 to 3 are
All programmed signals of buttons 1 to 3 are for the garage door actuator. deleted.
deleted. Afterwards, you usually have approx.
30 seconds to initiate step 5.

Operation, Safety 103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 104 Operation, Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Automatic Air Conditioning System, Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating
Air conditioning ......................................... 106
Automatic Air Conditioning System ............. 109
Central and Side Vents .............................. 112
Fresh-air Intake ......................................... 112
Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating ... 113

Automatic Air Conditioning System, Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating 105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A - Defrosting the windshield
B - Heated rear window
C - Temperature sensor
D - AC OFF button (air-conditioning compressor off/on)
E - Recirculating-air button
F - Temperature button
G - AC max
H - Air distribution to footwell
I - Air distribution to central and side vents
J - Air distribution to windshield
K - Blower speed button

Air Conditioning Setting temperature Adjusting blower speed

Air quantity, air distribution, and temperature can
f Press button F upwards or downwards f Press button K upwards or downwards
be set on the control panel.
respectively. respectively.
The preset blower speed is increased or de-
The display panel shows the following The selected temperature is shown on the display
creased.
by a bar display.
– Temperature The blower speed is shown on the display by a bar
If a bar cannot be seen, the temperature is set
display.
– Air-conditioning compressor on/off to maximum cold.
The compressor is switched off at low blower
– Blower speed If all bars can be seen, the temperature is set to
speeds.
maximum warm.
– AC max
– Air distribution Note
f For maximum cooling, activate AC max
button G.

106 Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Defrosting the windshield AC OFF– switching the air-conditioning Air distribution
compressor on and off
The individual air distributions can be combined as
f Press button A (switch on or off).
The air conditioning compressor switches off desired.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
automatically at temperatures below approx. If an air distribution is not selected, no symbol
The windshield is demisted or defrosted as
37 °F/3 °C and cannot be switched on, even appears in the display panel. Air flows then from
quickly as possible.
manually. all vents as well as to the windshield.
Air flows to the windshield only.
Whenever outside temperatures exceed approx. Recommended setting in Summer –
Recirculating-air setting 37 °F/3 °C, the air-conditioning compressor can Air distribution to central and side vents
be switched on or off manually.
Recommended setting in Winter –
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only the
The compressor can be switched off manual to Air distribution to footwell and windshield
inside air is circulated.
save fuel.
Air distribution to footwell
Warning! f Press AC OFF button D.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
Risk of accident due to impaired vision, f Press button H.
The compressor is switched off.
resulting in serious personal injury or death. The selection appears on the display panel.
In recirculating-air setting, the windows may f If the interior temperature is too high, switch The air flows to the footwell.
fog up. on the compressor again.
Air distribution to center and side
f Only select recirculating-air setting for short To dry incoming air in damp weather, do not vents
periods. switch off the air-conditioning compressor.
f Press button I.
This prevents fogging of windows.
f If the windows fog up, switch recirculating-air The selection appears on the display panel.
setting off immediately by pressing the The air flows from the central and side vents.
recirculating-air button again and select the AC max operation Vents must be open.
”Defrost windshield“ function.
In AC max operation, the interior of your vehicle is Air distribution to windshield
cooled as quickly as possible.
Switching recirculating-air mode on or off
f Press AC max button H. f Press button J.
f Press recirculating-air button E. The light-emitting diode in the button lights up. The selection appears on the display panel.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up. The air flows to the windshield.

Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating 107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Information on air-conditioning
compressor
– May switch off briefly to ensure sufficient
engine cooling if the engine is operating under
extreme load.
– The air-conditioning compressor switches off
automatically at temperatures below approx.
37 °F/3 °C and cannot be switched on, even
manually.
– Operates most effectively with the windows
closed.
If the vehicle has been in the sun for a long
time, it is a good idea to ventilate the interior
briefly with the windows open.
– Depending on the outside temperature and hu-
midity, condensation can drip from the evapo-
rator and form a pool under the car.
This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
– If uncooled air flows out when the lowest
temperature has been set, switch off the air
conditioning compressor and have the fault
remedied.
Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer
for further information.

108 Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A- Defrosting the windshield
B- Heated rear window
C- Temperature sensor
D- AC OFF button (air-conditioning compressor off/on)
E- Recirculating-air button
F- Temperature button
G- AUTO button (automatic mode)
H- Air distribution to footwell
I - Air distribution to central and side vents
J- Air distribution to windshield
K- Blower speed button

Automatic Air Conditioning System Automatic mode

The automatic air-conditioning system controls f Press AUTO button G.
the preselected interior temperature completely AUTO will appear on the display panel.
automatically. Air quantity and distribution are automatically
If necessary, the automatic system can be controlled and variations are compensated.
manually adjusted.
All automatic setting functions can be individually
changed.
This setting is retained until the appropriate
function button is pressed again or the AUTO
button is pressed.

Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating 109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Setting temperature Defrosting the windshield Adjusting blower speed
f Press button F upwards or downwards
f Press button A (switch on or off). f Press button K upwards or downwards respec-
respectively.
The windshield is defogged or defrosted as tively.
To suit personal comfort, the interior temperature quickly as possible. The preset blower speed is increased or
can be adjusted between 61 °F and 85 °F/16 °C Air flows to the windshield only. decreased.
and 29.5 °C. The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
The speed stages are indicated by a bar display.
Recommendation: 72 °F/22 °C.
AC OFF – switching compressor for air- If the button is pressed downwards at the lowest
If “LO” or “HI” appears on the display, the system
conditioning system on and off blower stage, the blower and automatic control
is operating at maximum cooling or heating pow-
are switched off. “OFF” will appear on the display
er.
The air-conditioning compressor switches off field.
Automatic control is no longer active.
automatically at temperatures below approx. Pressing the button upwards or pressing the
Note 37 °F/3 °C and cannot be switched on, even AUTO button switches the blower and automatic
manually. control back on again.
If the preselected temperature is changed, the
blower speed can increase automatically in auto- Whenever outside temperatures exceed approx.
matic mode. 37 °F/3 °C, the air-conditioning compressor is Recirculating-air setting
The desired temperature is reached more quickly always switched on in automatic mode.
this way. The compressor can be switched off to save fuel,
but control comfort is then limited: Warning!
Sensors
f Press AC OFF button D. Risk of accident due to impaired vision,
To avoid affecting the performance of the air-con- The compressor is switched off. resulting in serious personal injury or death.
ditioning system: The light-emitting diode in the button lights up. In recirculating-air setting, the windows may
fog up.
f Do not cover the sun sensor on the instrument f If the interior temperature is too high, switch
panel or the temperature sensor C. compressor back on or press AUTO button. f Only select recirculating-air setting for short
periods.
To dry incoming air in damp weather, do not
switch off the air-conditioning compressor. f If the windows fog up, switch recirculating-air
This prevents fogging of windows. setting off immediately by pressing the
circulating-air button again and select the
“Defrost windshield” function.

110 Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Switching recirculating-air setting on or off Air distribution to footwell General instructions for air-conditioning
f Press button E. compressor
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only f Press button H.
– Can switch off briefly if engine is under an ex-
the inside air is circulated. The air flows to the footwell.
treme load to ensure sufficient engine cooling.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up. The selection appears on the display panel.
– Switches off automatically at temperatures be-
Over approx. 37 °F/3 °C Air distribution to central and side
low approx. 37 °F/3 °C and cannot be
vents
If the air-conditioning compressor was off, it switched on, even manually.
switches on automatically. The duration of recircu- f Press button I.
– Operates most effectively with windows
lating-air setting is not limited. The air flows from the central and side vents.
closed.
Vents must be open.
If the car has been in the sun for a long time, it
Below approx. 37 °F/3 °C The selection appears on the display panel.
is a good idea to ventilate the interior briefly
The air-conditioning compressor is switched off. Air distribution to windshield with the windows open.
Recirculating-air setting is automatically ended
– Depending on the outside temperature and hu-
after approx. 3 minutes.
f Press button J. midity, condensation can drip from the evapo-
Air distribution The air flows to the windshield. rator and form a pool under the vehicle.
The selection appears on the display panel. This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
The individual air distributions can be combined as
Note on operation – If uncooled air flows out when the lowest
desired.
temperature has been set, switch off the air-
Recommended setting in Summer: f On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package conditioning compressor and have the fault
Air distribution to central and side vents. Plus, individual air conditioning settings can be repaired at an authorized Porsche dealer.
stored on your vehicle key.
Recommended setting in Winter: Please observe the chapter “Individual
Air distribution to footwell and windshield. Memory” in the separate PCM operating
instructions.

Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating 111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fresh-air Intake
To ensure proper air intake:
f Keep the fresh-air inlet between the luggage
compartment lid and the windshield free from
snow, ice and leaves.

A - Continuous opening and closing

B - Setting vent direction
Changing air flow direction
f Move the vanes to make the air flow in the
Central and Side Vents desired direction.
Outside air or conditioned air can be delivered
Opening vents
from all vents, depending on the air-distribution
setting on the operating panel.
f Rotate knurled wheel upward.

Closing vents
f Rotate knurled wheel downward.

112 Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Switching on
f Press button.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
After approx. 15 minutes, the heating switches off
automatically.
The heater can be switched back on by pressing
the button again.

Switching off
f Press button.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out.

Heated Rear Window/Door

Mirror Heating
The heated rear window/door mirror heating is
ready for operation when the ignition is on.

Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating 113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 114 Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings
Instrument Panel USA Models ..................... 116
Instrument Panel Canada Models ................ 118
Automatic Speed Control Indicator light ...... 120
Instrument Illumination ............................... 120
Trip Odometer .......................................... 121
Speedometer ............................................ 122
Changing over between Miles / Kilometers .. 122
Tachometer .............................................. 123
Turn Signal Indicator Light ......................... 123
High Beam Indicator Light .......................... 123
Gear Shift Indicator
(in vehicles with manual transmission) ......... 123
Cooling System ......................................... 124
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) .................. 125
Fuel .......................................................... 126
Clock ....................................................... 127
Outside Temperature ................................. 127
Check Engine (Emission Control) ................ 129
On-Board Computer (BC) ............................ 130
Warnings on the instrument panel and the on-
board computer ........................................ 162

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument Panel USA Models 14.Check Engine warning light When the ignition is switched on, the warning
(Emission control warning light) lights light up for a lamp check.
Also refer to the corresponding chapters in
15.Central warning light Note
the Owner’s Manual.
16.On-board computer display Warnings that have been given are stored in the
1.Speedometer with analogue display
17.Porsche Stability Management appropriate control unit memory and can be read
2.Automatic speed control indicator light out at an authorized Porsche dealer.
PSM Multifunctional light
3.Tire pressure warning light This information can help to warn you about situa-
18.Brake warning light
4.Turn signal indicator light, left/right tions which may be hazardous to you or your car.
19.Safety belt warning light
5.Tachometer
20.Gear display
6.High beam indicator light
21.PDK transmission, selector lever position
7.ABS warning light
22.Clock and outside temperature display
8.Cooling system
23.Adjustment button for clock
Temperature gage, warning light
9.Fuel
Level gage, warning light
10.Adjustment button for instrument illumination
and trip counter
11.Odometer and daily trip mileage display
12.Light sensor for instrument illumination
13.Airbag warning light

116 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument Panel Canada Models 14.Check Engine warning light When the ignition is switched on, the warning
(Emission control warning light) lights light up for a lamp check.
Also refer to the corresponding chapters in
15.Central warning light Note
the Owner’s Manual.
16.On-board computer display Warnings that have been given are stored in the
1.Speedometer with analogue display
17.Porsche Stability Management appropriate control unit memory and can be read
2.Automatic speed control indicator light out at an authorized Porsche dealer.
PSM Multifunctional light
3.Tire pressure warning light This information can help to warn you about situa-
18.Brake warning light
4.Turn signal indicator light, left/right tions which may be hazardous to you or your car.
19.Safety belt warning light
5.Tachometer
20.Gear display
6.High beam indicator light
21.PDK transmission, selector lever position
7.ABS warning light
22.Clock and outside temperature display
8.Cooling system
23.Adjustment button for clock
Temperature gage, warning light
9.Fuel
Level gage, warning light
10.Adjustment button for instrument illumination
and trip counter
11.Odometer and daily trip mileage display
12.Light sensor for instrument illumination
13.Airbag warning light

118 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument Illumination
The illumination is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness by the light sensor in the
tachometer.
In addition, when the car lights are switched on,
the instrument and switch symbol brightness can
be manually adjusted.

Warning!
Risk of loss of control or accident, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel
spokes while driving.

Note
A - Adjustment button for instrument illumination and Dimming instrument illumination
When the car lights are switched on, the instru-
trip counter
ment lighting for light dials switches on and off f Turn adjustment button A in the appropriate di-
automatically depending on the ambient bright- rection and hold it until the desired brightness
Automatic Speed Control ness. has been reached.
Indicator light The chosen level of brightness is indicated by a
Indicates automatic speed control readiness. bar display in the display field of the on-board
computer.

120 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Resetting to zero
f Press adjustment button A for approximately
one second or
f Reset the distance in the “SET” menu of the on-
board computer.
Please see the chapter “SET BASIC SETTING
ON ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on Page 159.
After exceeding 6,213 miles or 9,999 kilometers,
the counter returns to “0”.

Trip Odometer
Warning!
Risk of loss of control or accident, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel
spokes while driving.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Speedometer Changing over between
The digital speedometer is integrated in the on-
Miles / Kilometers
board computer. The units of the distance and speed displays can
The indication changes from mph to km/h when be changed in the “SET” menu of the on-board
the units are changed from miles to kilometers. computer.
f Please see the chapter “SET BASIC SETTING
ON ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on Page 159.

122 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Caution!
To avoid severe engine damage.
f Always observe the engine rpm before down-
shifting to a lower gear, so you do not exceed
the maximum engine rpm.

Turn Signal Indicator Light

Flashes in synchronism with the turn signals.
Left arrow – left turn signals
Right arrow – right turn signals
f If the frequency of the display becomes notice-
ably faster, check the operation of the turn sig-
nals.

Tachometer High Beam Indicator Light Gear Shift Indicator

The tachometer shows the engine speed in revolu-
(in vehicles with manual transmission)
tions per minute (rpm). Lights when high beam or headlight flasher is
switched on. The consumption-orientated gear shift indicator A
The beginning of the red marks at the right end of on the display panel of the on-board computer
the scale indicates the maximum permissible en- The indicator light goes out when the high beams
are switched off. assists a fuel-saving driving style. The gear shift
gine rpm. indicator lights up as a recommendation to shift
A speed limiter prevents the engine from being The indicator light flashes in the event of cornering up to the next-higher gear depending on the
overrevved during acceleration. Before reaching light failure. selected gear, engine rpm and accelerator pedal
this area, the next higher gear should be select- position.
ed.
Shift to the next lower gear when the engine rpm f When the gear shift indicator A lights up,
drops below 1,500 rpm. change to the next higher gear to decrease
fuel consumption.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Pointer in the middle – normal operating tem- If the coolant level is too low, the warning light
perature flashes.
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
The pointer may move up to the red area when en-
computer.
gine is heavily loaded and outside temperature is
high, but should return to “normal” when engine f Switch engine off and allow to cool.
load is reduced.
f Add coolant after the engine has cooled to the
touch.
Warning light “A”
f Have the cause of the fault remedied at an au-
If the coolant temperature is too high, the warn- thorized Porsche dealer.
ing light comes on. Please see the chapter “COOLANT LEVEL” on
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board Page 197.
computer.
Caution!
f Pull off the road, turn off the engine and allow
to cool. Risk of engine damage.
f Check radiator and air passages in front end of f If the warning lights come on even though cool-
car for obstructions. ant level is correct, do not continue driving.
Cooling System f Check coolant level. f Have the fault remedied at the nearest
If necessary, add coolant and have fault reme- authorized Porsche dealer.
Temperature gage (ignition on) died at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Please see the chapter “COOLANT LEVEL” on
USA: Display in °F Page 197. Engine compartment blower fan
Canada: Display in °C
Note In addition, this warning light flashes to indicate a
Pointer to the left – engine cold fault in the engine compartment blower fan.
To prevent excessive temperatures, the cooling-
f Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine air passages must not be restricted by coverings f Have the cause of the fault remedied at an
loading. (e.g. films, “stone guards”). authorized Porsche dealer.

124 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning messages Warning “Transmission emergency run” red
– Effect:
If the selector lever is between two positions
Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a
– Effects: stop.
The corresponding selector lever position Remedy:
flashes on the instrument cluster and the It is not possible to continue driving. Immedi-
warning “Selector lever not engaged” appears ately stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Have
on the on-board computer. the vehicle towed to an authorized Porsche
Remedy: dealer.
Operate the footbrake and engage the
Warning “Transmission temperature too high”
selector lever properly.
– Effects:
If there is a fault in the transmission “Warning jerks” can be felt when driving off and
– Depending on priority, the warning “Transmis- the engine power may be restricted.
sion emergency run” in white or red lettering or Remedies:
the warning “Transmission temperature too Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on
high” is displayed on the on-board computer. a hill, for example. Hold the vehicle with the
brake. Reduce engine load. If possible, stop
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) Warning “Transmission emergency run” white the vehicle in a suitable place. Allow the engine
f Effects: to run in selector lever position P or N until the
Indicator for PDK selector lever position Restricted gearshift comfort, warning disappears.
and engaged gear Failure of reverse gear. f Please see the chapter “REDUCED DRIVING
Remedy: PROGRAM” on Page 180.
When the engine is running, the selector lever
Have the fault repaired immediately at an
position and the engaged forward gear are
authorized Porsche dealer. f Please see the chapter “PORSCHE DOPPEL-
indicated in gates D or M. KUPPLUNG (PDK)” on Page 174.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 125

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Note If the level gage warning light flashes, there
has been a system fault.
If a small quantity of fuel is added to a nearly emp-
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
ty fuel tank, the fuel gage cannot measure the add-
computer.
ed fuel accurately. The „remaining range“ readout
There will then be no reserve warning.
will also be incorrect.
f To remedy the fault, go to an authorized
Warning light “A” Porsche dealer.

When the engine is running, the warning light

of the level gage lights up if less than approx.
2.6 U.S. gallons (10 liters) of fuel remains in the
tank.
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
computer.
f Fill up at the next opportunity.

Caution!
Fuel To prevent damage to the emission control
system and engine.
Level gage f Never drive the tank completely out of fuel.
f Avoid high cornering speeds after the warning
When the ignition is on the fuel level is displayed.
lights have come on.
f Please see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Page 281. f Please see the chapter “EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM” on Page 208.
If the vehicle’s inclination changes (e.g. going up
or downhill), minor deviations in the indication may
occur.

126 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Setting the time Leaving adjustment mode
Automatically after one minute or:
Warning!
f Press adjustment button again.
Risk of loss of control or accident, resulting
in serious personal injury or death. When adjustment mode is deliberately left by
pressing the button, the time begins precisely to
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel the second.
spokes while driving.
Note
f Switch ignition on.
The time mode can be changed between 12h and
Setting hours 24h in the on-board computer.

f Press adjustment button A for about one sec-

ond. Outside Temperature
Hour display flashes.
The outside temperature display C does not indi-
f Turn button in the appropriate direction: cate, if ice is on the road.
to right – increase hours figure Even if a temperature above 32 °F (0 °C) is dis-
A - Adjustment button for clock to left – decrease hours figure. played, ice may still form on the road, for instance
B - Clock on bridges or when the road passes through a
C - Outside temperature display Adjustment in hours – turn button briefly heavily shaded area.
Fast adjustment (display cycles) –
Clock turn and hold button.

The clock is blanked out approximately four min- Setting minutes

utes after the ignition is switched off or when the
car is locked. f Press adjustment button again.
Minutes display flashes.
f Set by rotating as in hours mode.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Battery Central Warning Light Brake Warning Light USA
If the battery voltage drops abruptly, a warning The central warning light on the instrument panel Brake Warning Light Canada
message will be displayed by the on-board compu- lights up if there are warning messages in the The warning light on the instrument panel lights
ter. INFO menu. up:
If the warning is displayed by the on-board The messages can be called in the on-board – if the handbrake is on,
computer while the engine is running or while computer INFO menu:
– if the brake fluid level is low,
driving: f Please see the chapter “INFO WARNING MES-
f Stop the car in a safe place and stop the SAGES” on Page 136. – if the brake pads have reached the wear limit,
engine. – if the brake circuit division is defective.

Possible causes Additionally, a warning is displayed by the on-

board computer.
– Defect in the battery charging system.
f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
– Broken drive belt. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 162.
Warning!
Risk of engine damage with resultant loss of
control and accident, leading to serious per-
sonal injury or death.
A broken drive belt means there is no power
assistance to the steering (more effort is re-
quired to steer) and coolant pump function
will stop.
f Do not continue driving.
f Have the fault remedied at the nearest author-
ized Porsche dealer.

128 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Check Engine If the warning light in the instrument panel lights up
permanently without flashing before and remains
(Emission Control) on while driving, it suggests:

Warning Light – a potential engine control problem and the

need for system service or
The emission control system detects malfunctions – an improperly fastened tank cap or
early that could, for example, cause increased
pollutant emissions or consequential damage. – the vehicle was refueled while the engine was
Faults are indicated by a continuously lit or running.
flashing instrument panel warning light. f Stop immediately at a suitable and secure
The faults are recorded in the control unit's fault place and check tank cap for proper fastening.
memory. If tank cap was fastened correctly, see your au-
The warning light in the instrument panel lights up thorized Porsche dealer for service as soon as
when the ignition is switched on as a bulb check possible.
and goes out approx. 4 seconds after the engine
starts. If the warning light does not light up, have Caution!
the bulb replaced promptly. If the check engine warning light in the in-
The warning light in the instrument panel flashes to strument panel is flashing, serious catalytic
indicate operating states (e.g. engine misfiring) converter damage and power loss will soon
which might cause damage to certain parts of the occur.
emission control system. Prolonged driving with the check engine war-
ning light on could cause damage to the
f In this case, immediately reduce the engine
emission control system. It also could affect
load by easing off the accelerator.
fuel economy and driveability.
f In order to avoid consequential damage to the
f Have the fault remedied at the nearest
engine or emission control system (e.g. cata-
authorized Porsche dealer immediately.
lytic converter), have the fault diagnosed and
rectified immediately at the nearest authorized
Porsche dealer.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating lever
The on-board computer is operated with the lower
left lever on the steering column.

Selecting functions of the on-board

computer
f Push lever up 3 or down 4.

Confirming selection (Enter)

f Push the lever forward 1.

Moving back one or several selection levels

f Pull the lever back 2 once or several times or
f Select the arrow on the on-board compu-
ter display with the operating lever and push
the operating lever forward 1.
On-Board Computer (BC) Operation, controls
Note
It is not possible to describe all details of the on-
Display field board computer functions in this Owner’s Manual. You can always return to the basic menu by pulling
However, the examples will quickly familiarize you the operating lever several times.
The display field is beneath the tachometer.
with the operational principle and help you to
navigate through the menu structure. 5 - Button for voice control
Readiness for operation f Please refer to the separate operating
You can restore the factory default settings at any
instructions for Porsche Communication
– With ignition switched on, time by using the “SET” menu.
Management (PCM).
– with engine running.

130 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Basic setting
– Central display: .... Radio station
The central line B of the on-board computer can
be selected in the SET menu.

Calling on-board computer functions in

display “C”
f Push operating lever up or down
(selection field D must be switched off).
The following displays can be called step by step:
– Average speed (ø mph),
– Average consumption (ø mpg),
– Range on remaining fuel (mls ),
– Tire pressure
A - Digital speedometer
– Navigation information
B - Central display
C - Bottom display (if activated in the SET menu).

Note
Functions and display possibilities
The values “Average speed”, “Average consump-
Note tion” and “Daily trip mileage” can be reset to zero
The available items and displays in the on-board in the SET menu.
computer depend on the equipment of your vehi-
cle. For this reason it is possible that some of the
items and displays shown here are not available in
your on-board computer.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 131

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 D - Switching selection field “D” on or off E - Arrow symbol for continuation The following menus are available, depending on
vehicle equipment:
f Push operating lever forward or back. Arrow symbol:
1. LIMIT
f Push operating lever down in order to page
through the menu. 2. INFO

Arrow symbol: 3. TEL

f Push operating lever up in order to page 4. CHRONO

through the menu. 5. AUDIO
6. NAVI
7. OIL
8. TPM
9. SET

132 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 LIMIT
Acoustic warning signal for speed limit
The acoustic warning signal can be activated for
speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
The signal sounds when the preset speed is ex-
ceeded.
For the signal to sound again, the driving speed
must fall below the preset speed by at least
3 mph (5 km/h).

Switching on selection field “D”

f Push operating lever forward.

Setting the speed f Push operating lever forward.

f Select LIMIT with the operating lever.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 133

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Option 1: Option 2: f Select “xx mph” with the operating lever.
Accepting current speed Presetting speed
f Push operating lever forward.
f Push operating lever forward. f Select “LIMIT active” with the operating lever:
The acoustic warning signal is activated for the not active
current speed.
active
Display:
If the vehicle is stationary, the message “Cannot f If “not active”, push the operating lever for-
be accepted with car stopped” is displayed. ward.

134 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Switching the acoustic warning signal off
f Select “LIMIT active” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
Display:

f Push operating lever slightly up or down until

the desired speed is reached.

upwards: speed is increased

downwards: speed is decreased

Note
Holding the lever up or down for a longer period
will adjust the speed in steps of 6 mph (10 km/h).
f Push operating lever forward.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 135

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 INFO f Push operating lever forward. f Push operating lever forward.
Warning messages f Select “Messages” with the operating lever. f Push operating lever forwards or pull back-
wards.
Switching on selection field “D” f Push operating lever forward.
The display returns to the Info menu.
f Push operating lever forward. Any existing warning messages can be called us-
ing the operating lever.
Calling warning messages You also can call warning messages which were
cancelled during the journey (but only until the next
f Select INFO with the operating lever.
time the ignition is switched on).

136 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Service TEL f Push operating lever forward.
Telephone information
Switching on selection field “D”
Switching on selection field “D”
f Push operating lever forward.
f Push operating lever forward.
Recalling service information
Recalling telephone information
f Select INFO with the operating lever.
f Select TEL with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
f Select “Service” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
f The time until the next service is displayed in
miles and days.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 137

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Note Example: f Push operating lever forward.
Selecting from the telephone book and
You can recall phone calls, e.g. calls that arrived f Select a person to call and push the operating
calling
during your absence, via the menu item “Missed lever forward.
calls”. f Select “Phone book” with the operating lever. The connection is established.

138 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f Push the operating lever forward to end the Incoming call
call.
f Select “Accept” or “Refuse” and push the
operating lever forward.

Note
Rejected phone calls can be recalled with the
menu item “Missed calls”.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 139

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Stopwatch on the instrument panel Note on operation
The stopwatch has an analogue and a digital dis- When you leave the CHRONO menu while the stop-
play. watch is running, measurement will continue.
The large pointer of the analogue display meas-
The stopwatch stops after the ignition is switched
ures the seconds. The two small pointers measure
off. If the ignition is switched on again within ap-
hours and minutes. The display re-starts at zero af-
prox. 4 minutes, the stopwatch will continue to
ter 12 hours.
run.
Seconds and increments of 1/100th of a second
can be read on the digital display. The only way to reset the stopwatch to zero is by
The digital display and the display in the on-board selecting “Reset” in the CHRONO menu.
computer can indicate up to 99 hours and
59 minutes.
The stopwatch can be swivelled both to the left
and to the right.

Stopwatch displays:
– on the stopwatch on the instrument panel,
CHRONO
Stopwatch – in the on-board computer menu CHRONO,
– on the performance display in the PCM.
You can use the stopwatch to measure time inter-
vals, e.g. on the race circuit or on work-related Starting/stopping stopwatch
journeys. Measured lap times can be stored and
evaluated if the vehicle is equipped with Porsche All stopwatch displays are started and stopped via
Communication Management (PCM). the on-board computer menu CHRONO.

f Please observe the chapter “Sport display” in

the separate PCM operating instructions.

140 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Starting the timing f Push operating lever forward. f Push operating lever forward.
The time runs on all stopwatch displays.
f Push operating lever forward.
The on-board computer display changes to the
The selection field is switched on.
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection.
f Select CHRONO with the operating lever.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 141

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Stopping the timing f Push lever forward. Continue timing
The time is stopped in all stopwatch displays,
After time measurement is started, the on-board After timing has been stopped, the on-board com-
and the on-board computer display changes to
computer display changes to the “Stop timing/In- puter display changes to the “Continue/Reset” se-
the “Continue/Reset” selection.
termediate time”. lection.
f Select “Stop timing” with the operating lever. The timing can be continued or reset to zero.

142 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f Push operating lever forward. Resetting the time f Push operating lever forward.
The stopwatch displays continue the timing. The display returns to the “Start timing”
After timing has been stopped, the on-board com-
selection.
The on-board computer display returns to the puter display changes to the “Continue/Reset” se-
The stopwatch displays in the instrument panel
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection. You lection.
and the on-board computer are reset to zero.
can stop the stopwatch or measure an inter- f Select “Reset” with the operating lever.
mediate time.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 143

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A - Lap After timing has been started, the on-board com- f Select “Intermediate time” with the operating
B - Intermediate time puter display changes to the “Stop timing/Inter- lever and push the operating lever forwards.
mediate time” selection.
Displaying intermediate times The intermediate time will be displayed for
approx. 5 seconds.
Several intermediate times can be displayed for a
route or for a lap on the race circuit. The interme-
diate times B are for your information.
Measured lap times A can be stored and evaluat-
ed if the vehicle is equipped with Porsche Commu-
nication Management (PCM).

144 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The on-board computer display then returns to the In order to start timing a new lap: The new lap is displayed on the on-board compu-
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection. ter and the PCM. Timing on the on-board computer
The “New lap?” selection appears for 5 seconds
f You can stop the stopwatch or measure anoth-
and on the PCM begins from zero. The stopwatch
after selection of “Intermediate time”.
in the instrument panel continues to show the total
er intermediate time.
f Select “New lap?” with the operating lever and time.
push the operating lever forwards.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 145

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f The on-board computer display returns to the AUDIO NAVI
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection after
a short period. Switching on selection field “D” Switching on selection field “D”
f You can stop the stopwatch or measure anoth- f Push operating lever forward. f Push operating lever forward.
er intermediate time or a new lap.
Selecting a radio station Select destination
f Select “AUDIO” with the operating lever. f Select “NAVI” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward. f Push operating lever forward.
f Select the desired station. f Select the desired function with the operating
lever:
f Push the operating lever up or down.
– Last destinations
– Destination memory
– Route guidance

146 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f The driver is responsible for filling the tires f Do not drive with tires whose tire pressure
correctly and making the correct settings on drops again in a short period of time. In cases
the on-board computer. of doubt, have tires checked by an authorized
Porsche dealer.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring offers the following
functions: f Damaged tires must be immediately replaced
by an authorized Porsche dealer.
– Display of the actual tire pressure while the
Tire repairs are not permissible under any
vehicle is in motion.
circumstances.
– Display of the deviation from the required
f If a fault occurs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring
pressure (refilling pressure).
(e.g. defective wheel transmitter), contact an
– Display of currently set tire size and type. authorized Porsche dealer immediately and
have the damage repaired.
– Tire pressure warnings in two stages.
The tire pressure will not be monitored at all or
will be monitored only partially by defective
Warning!
Tire Pressure Monitoring.
f Despite the advantages offered by the Tire
f Tires lose air over time without a tire defect
Pressure Monitoring, it is still the driver’s re-
being present. A tire pressure warning will then
TPM sponsibility to update the corresponding set-
appear in the on-board computer display.
Tire Pressure Monitoring tings in the on-board computer and maintain
Correct the tire pressure at the next oppor-
the pressure in the tires.
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR Low tire pressure reduces the road safety of
tunity.
COLD TIRES (68 °F/20 °C)” on Page 277. the vehicle and destroys the tire and wheel. f The Tire Pressure Monitoring gives a warning
about tire damage due to natural pressure loss
The Tire Pressure Monitoring continuously f When a flat tire has been displayed, immedi-
monitors tire pressure and tire temperature on all as well as about a gradual loss of pressure due
ately stop in a suitable place and check the
four wheels and warns the driver when the tire to foreign objects.
tires for damage. If necessary, remedy the
pressure is too low. The Tire Pressure Mnitoring cannot warn you
damage with a tire sealant.
about tire damage that occurs suddenly (e.g.
The display as well as the settings for the Tire f Do not by any means continue to drive with flat tire due to abrupt external effects).
Pressure Monitoring take place on the on-board damaged tires.
computer.
However, you must still adjust the tire pressure on f Sealing the tire with tire sealant is only an
the wheel. emergency repair, so you can drive to the next
authorized Porsche dealer. The maximum per-
mitted speed is 50 mph (80 km/h).

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 147

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning!
This display is for informational purposes
only. Under no circumstances should the tire
pressures be changed based on this display.
Changing the tire pressure to incorrect
pressures could adversely affect the perfor-
mance, driving characteristics, and safety of
your vehicle.
f Maintain tire pressures according to the units
indicated on the tire pressure plate, located on
the drivers side door of the vehicle.

Displaying the tire pressure function of the

on-board computer
f Push operating lever up or down until the tire
pressure function of the on-board computer
Tire pressure function of the on-board appears. Pressure info in tire pressure menu
computer (The selection field must be switched off.)
In accordance with physical principles, the air
The tire pressure function of the on-board pressure changes as the temperature changes.
computer displays the tire pressures (actual The tire pressure increases or decreases by
pressure) dependent on temperature in the four around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) for every 18 °F (10 °C)
wheels. change in temperature.
You can watch the tire pressure rise as the
The Tire Pressure Monitoring takes this relation-
temperature increases while driving.
ship between tire pressure and temperature into
This display is only for information.
account.
f Under no circumstances should the tire
f Please see the chapter “PRESSURE INCREASE
pressures be changed based on this display.
AS THE RESULT OF TEMPERATURE
INCREASE” on Page 156.
You can read the tire pressures to be
corrected in this display.

148 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The tire pressure to be corrected (refill pressure)
is indicated on the displayed wheel.
Example: If “ –1.5 psi (–0.1 bar)” is displayed,
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) must be added to this tire.

Note
The tire pressure menu can only be called up when
the vehicle is stationary.

Calling up the “Info pressure” display

f Push operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
f Select “TPM” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
The display changes to the tire pressure menu.
f Select “Info pressure” with the operating lever.
Tire type info in Tire pressure menu f Select “Info tires” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
Information about the currently set tires: f Push operating lever forward.
Note
– Tire type: Summer tires, winter tires Tire selection in the “Set” menu
After the ignition is switched on, it can take up to
approx. 1 minute before all tire pressures are – Tire size: 17, 18, 19 inch f Push operating lever forward in order to switch
displayed. Dashes (“-.-”) appear instead of the tire “Info tires” shows the current tire settings. on the selection field.
pressures. f Select “TPM” with the operating lever.
Calling up the “Info tires” display
f Push operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
f Select “TPM” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
The display changes to the tire pressure menu.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f Push operating lever forward. f Select “Set” with the operating lever. f Push the operating lever forward.
The display changes to the tire pressure menu.
f Select desired tire type:
summer or winter.
f Push operating lever forward.
A display for confirming the selected type of
tire appears.

150 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f Select “Continue” and push the operating lever f Select the appropriate tire size (17, 18 or 19 f Select “Continue” and push the operating lever
forward. inch) and push operating lever forwards. A dis- forward.
play for confirming the selected tire size ap-
pears.

Note
This menu is displayed only if the tire pressures
are different for the approved tire sizes.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 151

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Note Tire pressure warnings
The message “Process aborted” appears if the The tire pressure warning light on the instrument
setting process is interrupted. All entries made up panel and a corresponding message on the on-
to this point are lost, and the original settings board computer warn about loss of pressure in
remain in effect. two stages, depending on the amount of pressure
Only if the message “Process complete” appears loss.
after the settings have been made will the Tire
Driving with insufficient tire pressure reduces the
Pressure Monitoring re-learn the wheels.
road safety of the vehicle and destroys the tire and
f Please see the chapter “SYSTEM LEARNING” wheel.
on Page 154.
Stage 1 – Add air
Before fitting tires with sizes which are not stored
in the on-board computer, the missing information The pressure in the tire is too low by 4 to 7 psi (0.3
should be supplemented in the on-board to 0.5 bar).
computer. f The tire pressure warning contains the
f Please consult your authorized Porsche affected tire with the tire pressure to be added.
dealer. Correct the tire pressure at the next
The tire selection has only been successfully opportunity.
completed when the message “Process f Use only tires approved by Porsche.
complete” is displayed by the on-board computer. The available items in the tire pressure menu
f Select arrow (Back) and push the operating depend on the equipment of your vehicle. For this
lever forward. The display returns to the tire reason it is possible that some of the items shown
pressure menu. here are not available on your on-board
The on-board computer additionally displays computer’s display.
the message “System learning”. f Make sure that tire pressures correspond to
the on-board computer settings. Correct the
tire pressure if necessary.
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F/20 °C)” on Page 277.

152 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 This tire pressure warning also appears when
driving and can be acknowledged.
The tire pressure warning light on the instrument
panel goes out only when the tire pressure has
been corrected.

This tire pressure warning appears Stage 2 – Flat tire

– for approx. 10 seconds with vehicle stopped At speeds below 100 mph (160 km/h):
when switching off the ignition or
The pressure in the tire has dropped by more
– again when switching on the ignition. than 7 psi (0.5 bar). This significant pressure
With ignition on, the warning can be deactivated. loss is a danger to road safety.

The tire pressure warning light in the instrument At speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h):
panel goes out only when the tire pressure has The pressure in the tire has dropped by more
been corrected. than 5 psi (0.4 bar). This significant pressure
loss is a danger to road safety.
f When the tire pressure warning appears, stop
immediately at a suitable location. Check the
indicated tire for signs of damage. If neces-
sary, fill in tire sealant and set the correct tire
pressure.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 153

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System learning The Tire Pressure Monitoring requires a certain Changing a wheel and replacing tires
amount of time to learn the wheels. During this
The Tire Pressure Monitoring begins to “learn” the time, the current tire pressures are not available f New wheels must be fitted with radio transmit-
wheels after a wheel change, wheel transmitter on the on-board-computer: ters for the Tire Pressure Monitoring.
replacement or update of the tire settings. During Before tires are changed, the battery charge
– The tire pressure warning light remains lit until
this process, the Tire Pressure Monitoring recog- state of the wheel transmitters should be
all wheels have been learned.
nizes the tires and their locations. checked at an authorized Porsche dealer.
The on-board computer displayes the message – The display of the tire pressure function of the
f Switch the ignition off when changing a wheel.
“TPM is learning, monitoring not act.”. on-board computer shows lines.
The tire settings on the on-board computer must
– The required pressures for cold tires at 68 °F
be updated after changing a wheel.
(20 °C) are indicated in the Info pressure
If the tire settings are not updated, the message
display in the tire pressure menu.
“Wheel change? Input new TPM settings!” is
Position and pressure information is displayed as displayed on the on-board computer.
soon as the Tire Pressure Monitoring has as-
f Update the on-board computer settings when
signed the wheels identified as belonging to the
the vehicle is stationary the next time.
vehicle to the correct wheel positions.
The wheel learning process takes place
exclusively when the vehicle is being driven
(vehicle speed above 25 km/h (16 mph)).
f Check the tire pressure for all wheels on the
“Info pressure” display.
f Correct the tire pressure to the required
pressure if necessary.

154 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning light In the event of a defect in Tire Pressure Monitoring No monitoring
or a temporary fault, the warning light in the
speedometer flashes for approx. one minute and In the event of faults the Tire Pressure Monitoring
then remains continuously illuminated. cannot monitor the tire pressure.
Warning!
The warning light in the speedometer flashes for
The tire pressure warning light in the instrument
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPM approx. one minute and then remains continuously
panel goes out only when the cause of the fault
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system illuminated and a corresponding message
has been rectified.
is not operating properly. appears on the on-board computer.
The TPM malfunction indicator is combined with
Partial monitoring Monitoring is not active when:
the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the tellta- – the Tire Pressure Monitoring is faulty,
le will flash for approximately one minute and then Monitoring of the other wheels is continued if there
is a fault in one or two wheel transmitters. – wheel transmitters for the Tire Pressure
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
Monitoring are missing,
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as – The tire pressure warning light lights up.
long as the malfunction exists. – during the learning phase after the tire settings
– The message “TPM partial monitoring” is have been updated,
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
displayed on the on-board computer.
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire – after a wheel change without updating the tire
pressure as intended. – No tire pressures are displayed on the on- settings,
TPM malfuntions may occur for a variety of board computer for wheels with faulty wheel
reasons, including the installation of replacement transmitters. – more than four wheel transmitters are
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that detected,
prevent the TPM from functioning properly. – there is external interference by other radio
Always check the TPM malfunction telltale after sources, e.g. wireless headphones,
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter- – tire temperatures are too high.
nate tires and wheels allow the TPM to continue to f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
function properly. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 162.
The warning light in the speedometer lights up:
– When a loss in pressure has been detected.
– When learning newly mounted wheels/wheel
sensors, as long as the vehicle’s own wheels
have not yet been recognized.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 155

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Pressure increase as the result of Tire pressure specifications
temperature increase
Information on tire pressure for public roads can
In accordance with physical principles, the air be found in this Owner's Manual in the Technical
pressure changes as the temperature changes. Data chapter or on the tire-pressure plate in the
The tire pressure increases or decreases by left door aperture.
around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) for every 18 °F (10 °C) These values apply to cold tires at 68 °F (20 °C)
change in temperature. ambient temperature.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring takes this relation-
ship between tire pressure and temperature into
account.

156 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 OIL
Display and measurement of the engine
oil level
Caution!
Risk of engine damage.
f Regularly check the oil level each time before
refueling.
f Do not allow the oil level to fall below the
minimum mark.

Conditions for measuring the oil level

1. Vehicle stationary.
2. It is important to ensure that the vehicle is
horizontal for correct oil level measurement
to occur. Initiating oil level measurement 4. Allow waiting time to elapse.
3. Engine must be at operating temperature 1. Push operating lever forward in order to switch 5. Once the measurement has been completed,
(at least 140 °F/60 °C). on the selection field. you can read off the engine oil level on the
segment display.
4. Engine must be idling. 2. Select “OIL” with the operating lever.
3. Push operating lever forward. Measurement is
started.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 157

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f Please see the chapter “ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
on Page 199.
f Never add more engine oil than required
to reach the maximum mark.

Failure
A failure of the oil level display is indicated by a
warning message on the on-board computer.

“Check engine oil level” display

The on-board computer display “Check engine oil
level” is an additional measurement that takes
place in the background while driving.
The display depends on the distance travelled.
This display appears if the oil level has reached the
minimum mark or if the oil level is well above the
6. If the segments are filled in up to the top line, 7. If the bottom segment is filled in, the oil level maximum mark.
the oil level has reached the maximum mark. has reached the minimum mark. This message must be acknowledged by measu-
Under no circumstances add engine oil. ring the engine oil level manually using the on-
Add engine oil immediately. board computer.
8. If the bottom segment flashes, the oil level has f Please see the chapter “INITIATING OIL LEVEL
dropped to below the minimum mark. MEASUREMENT” on Page 157.

Add engine oil immediately. If an oil level measurement was initiated manually
on the on-board computer and no oil was topped
The difference between the minimum and up, the message “Check engine oil level” is
maximum marks on the segment display is displayed again when the vehicle is driven.
approx. 1.3 quarts (1.25 litres).
One segment of the display corresponds to a
top-up quantity of approx. 0.42 quarts (0.4 litre).
f Add engine oil if necessary.
Switch off ignition before adding engine oil.

158 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Display
(Select central line of the on-board
computer)
– Change display
Audio information (set radio station)
Range on remaining fuel
Empty
– Telephone Info
When Telephone information is active, incom-
ing telephone calls are displayed on the on-
board computer.

Reset
SET
Basic setting on on-board computer – Reset all,
Reset average consumption,
Switching on selection field “D” Reset average speed,
f Push operating lever forward. Reset trip counter

Changing the basic setting of the on-board Units

computer – Speedometer: km - km/h, miles - mph
f Select “SET” with the operating lever. – Consumption:
f Push operating lever forward. l/100 km, mls/gal (USA), mpg (UK), km/l

f Select the desired function with the operating – Temperature: °Celsius, °Fahrenheit
lever: – Tire pressure: bar, psi

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 159

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f Please see the chapter “DAYTIME DRIVING
LIGHTS” on Page 78.
f Please see the chapter “DAYTIME DRIVING
LIGHTS” on Page 80.

General information regarding the

on-board computer functions
Range on remaining fuel
The range on remaining fuel is continuously recal-
culated during the journey based on the fuel level,
current consumption and average consumption.
The more the fuel level falls, the more spontan-
eously the display reacts. For this reason, the
range on remaining fuel is not displayed if less
than 9 miles (15 kilometers).
If the vehicle's inclination changes while driving or
Navigation 12/24h mode
refueling, incorrect range information may tempo-
– Integrated in the BC Select time mode: rarily be given.
(Navigation instructions can be recalled on the
– 12h (small squares on the right side of the time
on-board computer display) Note
display for AM/PM),
– When turning off If the tank is nearly empty and you top up with only
– 24h
(Navigation instructions are only shown before a small quantity of fuel, an accurate range on re-
changing direction) maining fuel is impossible.
Light
Basic setting USA only:
Switch daytime driving lights on and off.
– Restore the basic setting of the on-board com-
puter Daytime driving lights
(daytime driving lights switched off)
Language
– Select language version Daytime driving lights
(daytime driving lights switched on)

160 Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Average consumption and average speed
The values displayed are based on the distance
travelled since the last reset to “zero”.
You can set the starting time for a measurement
before or during the trip.
Switching the ignition off does not reset the meas-
urements. It is therefore possible to collect values
over long periods.
Disconnecting the car battery will cause these
memories to be erased.

Tire pressure
The Tire pressure function of the on-board
computer displays the tire pressures dependent
on temperature in the four wheels. You can watch
the tire pressure rise and fall while driving.
The display is only for information.
f To correct the tire pressures, always use the
displayed values from the “Info pressure”
display in the tire pressure menu.

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 161

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warnings on the instrument panel and the on-board computer
If a warning message appears, always refer to the corresponding chapters in the Owner’s Manual.
Warning messages are issued only if all measurement preconditions are met. Therefore, check all fluid levels regularly –
in particular, always check the engine oil level before refuelling.

Instrument On-board Text display on on-board Meaning/measure

panel computer computer
Seat belt Driver and passengers must fasten their seat
belts.
Handbrake Handbrake is still on.

Ignition key
not removed
Replace battery Replace the remote-control battery.
in ignition key
Ignition lock faulty, Have the fault remedied at an authorized
please go to workshop Porsche dealer.
Ignition lock faulty, Have the fault remedied at an authorized
visit workshop now Porsche dealer.
Relieve steering Relieve the steering lock by moving the steering
wheel to the left or right.
Steering locked The steering wheel lock remains engaged.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Lights on Low beam/side marker lamps on

Parking light on Left/right parking light on

162 Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument On-board Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
panel computer computer
Check left/right dipped beam (low The reported light is faulty. Check bulb.
beam) Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
also applies to:
direction indicator, high beam, side in-
dicator light, reversing light
Daytime Daytime driving lights switch off when the en-
driving lights off gine is shut off. Switch on lights if necessary.
Headlight beam Have the fault remedied at an authorized
adjustment faulty Porsche dealer.
Front lid not closed Close front luggage compartment lid properly.

Rear lid not closed Close rear luggage compartment lid properly.

Rain sensor faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized

Porsche dealer.
Steering wheel heating Steering wheel heating was switched on.
ON
Steering wheel heating Steering wheel heating was switched off.
OFF
Launch
control
active
Drive Off Assistant Have the fault remedied at an authorized
failure Porsche dealer.
Refill washer fluid

LIMIT The current speed can only be accepted for the

Cannot be accepted acoustic warning signal when the vehicle is in
with vehicle stopped motion.

Warnings 163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument On-board Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
panel computer computer
LIMIT Selected speed limit (e.g. 30 mph) for the
30 acoustic warning signal has been exceeded.
Adjust your speed if necessary.
Fuel gage warning Consider remaining range Refuel at next opportunity.
light

Check engine oil level Start engine oil level measurement in the
on-board computer.

Engine oil pressure too low Stop immediately at a suitable place, measure
oil level with the on-board computer and, if nec-
essary, add engine oil.
Warning light Engine temperature too high Switch engine off and let it cool.
Temperature gage Check coolant level and, if necessary,
add coolant.
Temperature gage Check coolant level Switch engine off and let it cool.
warning light flash- Check coolant level and, if necessary, add cool-
es ant.
Engine diagnostics – workshop Stop immediately at a suitale place and check
tank cap for proper fastening. If the tank cap
was fastened correctly, consult your authorized
Porsche dealer.
Reduced engine power Consult your authorized Porsche dealer.

Temperature gage Failure of Consult your authorized Porsche dealer.

warning light flash- engine compartment blower
es
Warning Battery/generator Stop at a safe place and switch the engine off.
Do not continue driving.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.

164 Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument On-board Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
panel computer computer
Oil pressure gage faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.

Oil level display faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized

Porsche dealer.

Oil temperature gage faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized

Porsche dealer.

Oil temperature Switch engine off and let it cool. Check oil level
too high and, if necessary, add oil.
Please observe the chapter “OIL DISPLAY AND
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL“.
Indicator faulty Coolant indicator failed.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Brake pad wear Have the brake pads changed immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.

Warning – Brake fluid level Stop immediately in a suitable place.

Do not continue driving. Have the fault remedied
at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Warning – Brake circuit division Stop immediately in a suitable place.

Do not continue driving. Have the fault remedied
at an authorized Porsche dealer.

ABS failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized

Porsche dealer.

PSM off Porsche Stability Management has been

switched off.

Warnings 165

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument On-board Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
panel computer computer
PSM on Porsche Stability Management has been
switched on.

PSM failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized

Porsche dealer.

PSM Please observe the chapter “PUTTING VEHICLE

initialisation INTO OPERATION“.

PASM Normal/Sport Indicator for selected PASM mode

PASM failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized

Porsche dealer.

PASM indicator faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized

Porsche dealer.

Sport mode failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized

Porsche dealer.

Airbag system fault Airbag is faulty.

Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Check passenger’s seat setting Weight sensing is impaired on the front
passenger's seat (Advanced Airbag).
Correct the seating position, set the backrest
upright, do not support weight on the armrests,
or lift on the handles.
Failure spoiler control Driving stability is impaired.
Adjust your driving style. Reduce speed.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Display of Selector lever is not engaged Porsche Doppelkupplung:
selector lever posi- Selector lever can be between two positions.
tion flashes Engage the selector lever correctly.

166 Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument On-board Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
panel computer computer
Move selector lever to P Porsche Doppelkupplung:
Move selector lever to position P before with-
drawing key from ignition lock.
Apply brake Porsche Doppelkupplung:
Apply the brake when starting.

Depress clutch pedal Manual transmission:

Depress clutch pedal when starting.

Move selector lever Porsche Doppelkupplung:

to position P or N The vehicle can be started only in the selector
lever position P or N.
Text display in white: Restricted gearshift comfort,
failure of reverse gear.
Transmission Have the fault remedied at an authorized
emergency run Porsche dealer.
Text display in red: No selector lever position is displayed on the
instrument cluster.
Transmission Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a
emergency run stop.

It is not possible to continue driving. Immedi-

ately stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Have
the vehicle towed to an authorized Porsche
dealer.
Transmission Jerking can be felt when driving off, and the
temperature engine power may be restricted.
too high
Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on
a hill, for example. Hold the vehicle with the
brake. Reduce engine load. If possible, stop the
vehicle in a suitable place. Allow the engine to
run in selector lever position P or N until the
warning disappears.

Warnings 167

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument On-board Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
panel computer computer
System fault Several systems may have failed. Adjust your
Go to workshop driving style. Reduce speed.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Failure of fuel level indicator Have the fault remedied at an authorized
Workshop Porsche dealer.

Service in mls/days Service indicator

Bring the vehicle in for service no later than af-
ter the distance/time shown has elapsed.
Please observe the additional information in the
“Maintenance” booklet.
Service now Service indicator
Have your vehicle serviced at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Failure Activate convertible top in opposite direction.
Convertible-top control If there is a failure:
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Convertible top not in limit position Fully open or close convertible top

Opening convertible top Message goes out in final position

Closing convertible top Message goes out in final position

Rear lid The convertible top cannot be operated with the

not closed rear lid open.

Flat tyre! Tire Pressure Monitoring has detected a serious

pressure loss.
Stop at a suitable place and check tires for dam-
age. Fill in tire sealant if necessary.

168 Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Instrument On-board Text display on on-board Meaning/measure
panel computer computer
Add air The Tire Pressure Monitoring has detected a
gradual pressure loss. Correct tire pressure at
the next opportunity.
TPM is learning The Tire Pressure Monitoring is learning the
monitoring wheels on the vehicle. The Tire Pressure Moni-
not act. toring is searching for the tires and their posi-
tion. During this period the current pressure
specifications are not available on the on-board
computer.
TPM inactive The Tire Pressure Monitoring is faulty.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.

TPM partial monitoring 1 or 2 wheel transmitters are faulty. The tyre

pressures of these wheels are not monitored.
The other wheels are still monitored.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
TPM inactive The Tire Pressure Monitoring is temporarily de-
Brief disturbance activated by excessive tire temperatures (ap-
prox. 248 °F (120 °C)) or external interference
TPM inactive (e.g. from other wheel transmitters inside the
Too many wheel transmitters car). Once the source of the interference is re-
moved, the system is automatically reactivated.
Wheel change? Update the settings in the TPM menu of the
Input new on-board computer at the next opportunity.
TPM settings! Wrong entries will affect the correct pressure in-
formation in the menu. The safety of your vehi-
cle is at risk.
TPM The display of the Tire Pressure Monitoring is
Indicator faulty faulty.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.

Warnings 169

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Acknowledging warning messages
Warning messages can be deleted from the on-board computer display.
f Push the on-board computer operating lever forward.
You can recall erased warning messages in the “INFO” menu.

170 Warnings

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Shifting Gears
Manual Transmission, Clutch ...................... 172
Drive-Off Assistant ..................................... 173
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) .................. 174

Shifting Gears 171

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 To avoid damage to the clutch and transmis- Permitted engine speed
sion:
f You should change into a higher gear before
f Always depress the clutch pedal fully when
the needle reaches the red mark on the
changing gears. Make sure that the gearshift
tachometer, or ease off the accelerator.
lever is completely engaged.
If the red zone is reached during acceleration, fuel
f Only shift into reverse when the car has come
feed is interrupted.
to a complete stop.
Caution!
f When shifting gears, always ensure that the
clutch pedal is fully depressed and the gear Risk of engine damage (overrevving) when
has fully engaged. shifting down to a lower gear.
f Select reverse only when vehicle is stationary. f Take care not to exceed the maximum
Reverse gear can be engaged after shifting the permitted engine speed when shifting down.
gearshift lever as far as possible to the left.
f Select an appropriately low gear on upward
and downward slopes.
Manual Transmission, Clutch This will ensure optimum use of engine power
and engine braking.
The positions of the gears are shown on the shift
diagram on the gearshift lever. When reverse gear is selected and the ignition is
on, the backup lights are illuminated.
Warning!
Risk of accident, resulting in serious person-
al injury or death.
f Do not obstruct the pedal travel with floor mats
or other objects.
Nonskid floor mats of the correct size are
available at your authorized Porsche dealer.

172 Shifting Gears

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Drive-Off Assistant Driving off with the Drive-Off Assistant Driving off with the Drive-Off Assistant
(vehicles with manual transmission) (vehicles with PDK transmission)
The Drive-Off Assistant assists the driver when
1. Hold the vehicle securely on the slope with the 1. Hold the vehicle securely on the slope with the
moving off on hills.
brake pedal. brake pedal.
The vehicle must have sufficient road contact.
The engine must be running. The engine must be running.
The Drive-Off Assistant is available on gradients as
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal. 2. Select a gear corresponding to the direction
from around 5%.
of travel up the slope (selector lever position
3. Engage a gear corresponding to the direction
D or R).
Danger! of travel up the slope (1st gear or reverse
gear). 3. Fully release the parking brake.
Risk of accident.
Assistance by the Drive-Off Assistant is not 4. Fully release the parking brake. 4. Release the brake pedal.
guaranteed when moving off on a slippery The vehicle is held on the slope for a short time
5. While keeping the clutch pedal depressed,
surface (e.g. on icy or loose surfaces). In this in order to allow driving off directly after the
release the brake pedal.
case, the vehicle could slip. brake is released.
The vehicle is held on the slope for a short time
The limits dictated by the laws of physics in order to allow driving off directly after the 5. Move off as usual.
cannot be overcome, even with the Drive-Off brake is released.
Assistant. The responsibility for moving off Note on operation
on upward slopes is still the driver’s, despite 6. Move off as usual.
the Drive-Off Assistant. The Drive-Off Assistant is not active:
Note on operation
f Always adjust your driving style to the driving – In the event of shift to neutral.
conditions and vehicle load, use the brake The Drive-Off Assistant is not active:
– If the vehicle is not stationary.
pedal if necessary. – If the clutch is not depressed.
– If the engine is not running.
Risk of accident. – If the vehicle is not stationary.
If the Drive-Off Assistant is not functioning, – On gradients of less than 5%.
the driver cannot be assisted when moving – If the engine is not running.
– If the pressure on the brake pedal is too low.
off on hills. – On gradients of less than 5%.
f Hold the vehicle with the brake pedal. – If the pressure on the brake pedal is too low.

Shifting Gears 173

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) Starting
The Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) is a seven- The engine can be started only if the brake
speed transmission with an “automatic” and a pedal is depressed and the selector lever is in
“manual” selection mode. position P or N.
In automatic selection mode (selector lever
position D), gear changing is automatic. Driving off
You can change temporarily from automatic to
manual mode using the shift buttons on the f Only select the desired position for driving off
steering wheel. (D, M or R) when the engine is idling and the
brake pedal is depressed.
In manual selection mode (selector lever
position M), you change gear using the shift f Since the vehicle creeps when in gear, do not
buttons on the steering wheel or with the PDK release the brake until you want to move off.
selector lever. f After selecting a gear, do not accelerate until
You can change between selector lever position D you can feel that the gear is engaged.
and M as you wish while driving.
Driving off on hills
Note Changing the selector lever position The Drive-Off Assistant assists the driver when
f Take care not to operate the shift buttons on The selector lever is locked when the ignition is
moving off on hills. The vehicle is held on the slope
the steering wheel inadvertently in either for a short time during the change from the brake
switched off.
automatic or manual mode, thereby triggering pedal to the accelerator in order to allow driving
undesired gear changes. When the ignition is switched on, the selector lever off directly after the brake is released.
can be moved from position P and N only when
f Please see the chapter “DRIVE-OFF ASSIS-
the release button is pressed, and when the brake
TANT” on Page 173.
pedal is pressed.

Release button
The release button (arrow) in the selector lever
prevents the gear from being changed unintention-
ally.
The release button must be pressed when shifting
to position R or P.

174 Shifting Gears

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If the selector lever is inadvertently (due to If there is a fault in the transmission:
a defect or incorrect operation) moved out of P or
– The warning “Transmission emergency run” in
N into gear without pressing the brake, this gear
white or red lettering or the warning “Transmis-
will start to “flash” and no power transmission is
sion temperature too high” is displayed on the
built up. To drive off, press the brake and move
on-board computer.
the selector lever from P or N into the required
Please see the chapter “REDUCED DRIVING
gear again.
PROGRAM” on Page 180.
Selector-lever position R or D is flashing in the f Have the fault repaired immediately at an
instrument cluster authorized Porsche dealer.
f Effects:
There is no power transmission.
The selector lever was engaged without
pressing the footbrake or only the restricted
driving programme is available when the
“Transmission emergency run” message
is displayed.

Indicator for selector lever position and Action required:

engaged gear Press the footbrake and engage the required
selector-lever position again by moving the
When the engine is running, the selector lever
selector lever from P or N.
position and engaged gear are indicated.
If reverse gear fails:
Please see the chapter “REDUCED DRIVING
If the selector lever is between two positions
PROGRAM” on Page 180.
– Effects:
The corresponding selector-lever position in
the instrument panel flashes and the warning
“Actuate brake” or “Selector lever not
engaged” appears on the on-board computer.
f Action required:
Operate the footbrake and engage the
selector lever properly.

Shifting Gears 175

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Selector lever positions D - Automatic selection mode With a sporty driving style, downshifts are already
initiated when the brake pedal is touched lightly.
Select position D for “normal” driving. The gears This further enhances a dynamic driving style.
P – Parking lock are shifted automatically according to the acceler- The PDK transmission temporarily changes to the
ator position and speed. sportiest gear-changing map, i.e. to the highest
f Engage parking lock only when vehicle is
possible gear-changing points, if the accelerator
stationary. Depending on the way the vehicle is driven
pedal is pressed quickly. The transmission accord-
If selector-lever position P is flashing in the (economical, comfortable or sporty driving style)
ingly shifts down immediately by one or two gears
instrument cluster, the parking brake is not and on the resistance (e.g. uphill), the gear-
(temporary change-down).
engaged. The vehicle can roll away. changing points are shifted towards higher or
Engage selector-lever position P again by lower engine-speed ranges. The transmission no longer selects 7th gear at
moving the selector lever out of R. The accelerator position, driving speed, engine high driving speeds.
speed, longitudinal and lateral acceleration and
f Engage parking lock after applying the
the road profile all have an influence on the gear- Sport mode
handbrake and release it before releasing the
changing characteristic. (“Sport” and “Sport Plus” modes)
handbrake.
Unwanted upward shifts, e.g. before bends, are “Sport” mode activated:
The ignition key can be withdrawn only in The PDK transmission switches to a sporty gear-
prevented by swiftly releasing the accelerator
selector lever position P. changing map and shortens the gear shifting
pedal.
times.
R – Reverse gear Depending on lateral acceleration, upward A sporty driving style is recognised more quickly
changes on bends are not made until the engine- and the gear-changing speeds are adapted to
f Select only if car is stationary and the brake is speed limit is reached. driving performance.
applied. Under braking, and depending on the amount of Deceleration downshifts are commenced earlier.
deceleration, the PDK transmission changes down Downshifts are already carried out in the case of
N – Neutral earlier. slight decelerations, even at higher engine
For subsequent cornering, the right gear is speeds.
Selector lever position N must be selected for engaged when pressure is applied to the brakes
towing or in car washes, for example. before the bend. The bend is taken in the right
f Only select the desired position for driving off gear, and when you accelerate out of the bend you
(D, M or R) when the engine is idling and the do not have to change down.
brake pedal is depressed.

176 Shifting Gears

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 “Sport Plus” mode activated: f Do not use Launch Control if there is a possibi- 3. Release the brake within a few seconds.
In “Sport Plus” mode, the PDK transmission lity it could endanger other persons. Such a
changes to a shift program designed for driving possibility exists if you cannot see that you Remaining stationary for a long time with
on race circuits. 7th gear is not selected. have a clear road with no possibility of cross “Launch Control active” can lead to overload-
The gear-changing performance is enhanced traffic in your intended direction of driving. ing of the transmission.
significantly again compared with “Sport” mode. In order to protect the transmission, the engine
power is then reduced and the “Launch Control
f Please see the chapter “SPORT MODE” on Caution! active” process is cancelled.
Page 61.
Stress on components increases dramatically
when starting with maximum acceleration in Shifting gears on the steering wheel
Driving with Launch Control
comparison with normal driving off. Use of With the shift buttons on the steering wheel, you
Driving with Launch Control allows you to achieve Launch Control will inevitably reduce the life can change temporarily from automatic selection
maximum acceleration from a standing start. It is of the engaged engine and transmission mode D to manual mode M.
intended to provide you with a unique enjoyment of components.
your vehicle under controlled circumstances and For example:
is not intended to be used in any location where it Preconditions: – Shifting down before bends and on entering
could be a nuisance to other persons.
– Launch Control should only be used when the built-up areas.
Warning! engine has reached operating temperature. – Shifting down on downward slopes
– “Sport Plus” mode must be switched on (light- (engine braking).
There is a risk of endangering other road
users if you use this Control in an improper emitting diode in button is on and “SPORT – Shifting down for brief spurts of acceleration.
location or in a situation where other persons PLUS” is displayed on the on-board computer).
Manual selection mode remains engaged:
might need to take evasive action due to the 1. Press the brake with your left foot.
rapid acceleration that this technology – for cornering (depending on the lateral acceler-
permits. 2. Quickly press down the accelerator fully ation) and overrunning,
(kickdown activated) and hold.
f Launch Control is designed to be used in a The engine speed will flatten out at around – when the vehicle is stationary (e.g. at a
controlled environment on closed circuit 6500 rpm. junction).
driving courses where no vehicle cross traffic “Launch Control active” is displayed on the The system leaves manual selection mode:
or pedestrian traffic is present. on-board computer.
– automatically after approx. 8 seconds (unless
f Use Launch Control only if conditions permit it cornering or overrunning),
to be applied in a safe manner.
– after driving off.

Shifting Gears 177

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Kickdown
The kickdown function is active in selector lever
positions D and M.
f For optimum acceleration, e.g. when
overtaking, depress the accelerator pedal
beyond the full-throttle point (kickdown).
The transmission shifts down depending on the
speed of travel and engine speed.
Upward shifts occur at the highest possible engine
speeds.

M – Manual selection mode Shifting up +

The currently selected gear is retained when you f Press the PDK selector lever or shift button on
change from D to M. the steering wheel forward.

If you change from M to D, the gear-changing map Shifting down –

suitable for your current driving style is selected f Pull the PDK selector lever or shift button on
and the appropriate gear is selected. the steering wheel back.
The selector lever and the two shift buttons in the You can shift up or down by the corresponding
top steering wheel spokes allow you to comfort- number of gears by quickly pressing or pulling the
ably and reliably select the seven forward gears. shift buttons or selector lever several times in
succession.
The transmission can be shifted up or down by
several gears in succession by continuously
operating the selector lever or shift buttons.

178 Shifting Gears

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Depending on driving speed and engine speed, Failure of the selector lever display on the Stopping
you can shift up or down at any time. instrument cluster
f For a brief stop (e.g. at a traffic light), leave the
Gear changes which would exceed the upper or The warning “Transmission emergency run” is
selector lever in drive position and hold the
lower engine speed limit are not executed by the displayed in red on the on-board computer.
vehicle with the brake pedal.
controller.
– Effect:
f Do not hold the car on a slope using the
There is no automatic upshift at the upper engine No selector lever position is displayed on the
accelerator. Use the brake pedal or the
speed limit in selector lever position M. Upshift instrument cluster.
handbrake instead.
suppression can be cancelled by kickdown opera- Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a
tion. If, for example, the engine speed limit is stop. f Before leaving the vehicle, always apply the
reached during overtaking and the automatic Remedy: handbrake and move the selector lever to
upshift does not occur, the transmission in this It is not possible to continue driving. Immedi- position P.
case shifts up as a result of kickdown operation. ately stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Have
the vehicle towed to an authorized Porsche
f Select an appropriately low gear on upward Parking
dealer.
and downward slopes.
This will ensure optimum use of engine power
Please see the chapter “TOWING” on f Go easy on the accelerator!
Page 269.
and engine braking. f When parking or manoeuvring in a small
space, control the speed by careful use of the
In order to shift up automatically at the upper footbrake.
engine speed limit:
f Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the full- Driving in winter
throttle point (kickdown).
In wintry road conditions it is advisable to take
steep inclines in manual mode. This prevents gear
changes occurring that could cause wheelspin.

Tow-starting, towing
f Please see the chapter “TOWING” on
Page 269.

Shifting Gears 179

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Reduced driving program Warning “Transmission emergency run” red
– Effect:
If there is a fault in the transmission
Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a
– Depending on priority, the warning “Transmis- stop.
sion emergency run” in white or red lettering or Remedy:
the warning “Transmission temperature too It is not possible to continue driving. Immedi-
high” is displayed on the on-board computer. ately stop the vehicle in a suitable place. Have
Warning “Transmission emergency run” white the vehicle towed to an authorized Porsche
dealer.
– Effects:
Restricted gearshift comfort, Warning “Transmission temperature too high”
Reverse gear may not function. – Effects:
“Warning jerks” can be felt when driving off and
Remedy: the engine power may be restricted.
Have the fault repaired immediately at an Remedy:
authorized Porsche dealer. Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on
a hill, for example. Hold the vehicle with the
brake. Reduce engine load. If possible, stop
the vehicle in a suitable place. Allow the engine
to run in selector lever position P or N until the
warning disappears.

180 Shifting Gears

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mobile Roofs
Convertible Top ......................................... 182
Windstop .................................................. 189
Hardtop .................................................... 190

Mobile Roofs 181

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Convertible Top f Items of luggage or objects on the luggage Conditions for operating the convertible
tray above the engine compartment lid must top
Brief operating instructions can be found on the be put in the storage box or be secured to
back side of the driver’s sun visor. prevent their sliding out. These items must not – The ignition must be switched on
be in abrasive contact with the convertible top (engine running or off).
f Please see the chapter “CAR CARE INSTRUC-
or rear window. Keep shutters of the storage
TIONS” on Page 213. – Maximum speed 30 mph (50 km/h)
box closed while driving.
The opening/closing process of the convertib-
Warning! f Avoid frequent operation of the convertible top le top will be interrupted if the maximum speed
with the engine off; the vehicle battery would is exceeded.
When opening or closing the convertible top,
be unintentionally discharged rapidly.
serious personal injury may occur if a per- f Reduce speed.
son’s body parts are near or in the way of the f When opening or closing the convertible top, Press button again.
convertible top mechanism’s moving parts. ensure there is sufficient clearance above the The opening/closing process is ended.
convertible top (e.g. in the garage).
f Make absolutely sure that nobody can be
injured by the convertible-top mechanism or f To prevent damp stains and abrasions, only
the convertible-top compartment lid. open the convertible top in a dry, clean state.
f Park your car in the shade whenever possible,
Do not operate convertible top: as the fabric, rubber material and color can be
– At temperatures below 32 °F/0 °C. harmed by long exposure to sunlight.

– When one side of the car is on a curb, a hoist f The convertible top may only be actuated
or a jack. during driving on even surfaces.

– When items of luggage or other objects hinder f The convertible top must not be used with
the convertible top movement. strong counter wind (over approx. 50 mph/
80 km/h).
f Drive only with the convertible top fully open or
closed (end positions).

182 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Releasing convertible top

Caution!
Risk of damage by the locking hooks on the
roof frame when the latching lever is not
engaged correctly.
f Make sure that the latching lever is felt to
engage when opening.

f Swivel latching lever B to the rear until it is felt

to engage.

Opening the convertible top with the button

Warning!
Risk of injury.
Opening convertible top f When opening the convertible top, make sure f Up to 6 mph (10 km/h):
that nobody can be injured by the convertible- Pull the button and hold without interruption un-
Releasing the latching lever top mechanism or the convertible-top com- til the convertible top is in the final position and
f Press on the release plate A. partment lid. the message on the on-board computer goes
out.
Latching lever B pops into engaging position. f In order to abort convertible top operation in In case of danger, release the button.
the event of danger: Convertible top operation stops.
up to 6 mph (10 km/h), release the button im-
mediately, f From 6 mph (10 km/h) to 30 mph
over 6 mph (10 km/h), activate the button (50 km/h):
briefly. Pull button briefly, the convertible top opens
automatically. The message in on-board com-
puter goes out.
In case of danger, pull the button back again,
the convertible top operation stops.

Mobile Roofs 183

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Closing the convertible top f Lock convertible top with the latching lever.

Warning!
Danger of injury and damage.
f When closing the convertible top, make sure
that nobody can be injured by the convertible-
top mechanism or the convertible-top com-
partment lid.
f In order to abort convertible top operation in
the event of danger:
up to 6 mph (10 km/h), release the button im-
mediately,
over 6 mph (10 km/h), activate the button
briefly.
f Keep the lids of the make-up mirrors in the sun
visors closed when closing the convertible top.
Closing convertible top with the button
f Lock the convertible top with the latching lever
after automatic closing. f Up to 6 mph (10 km/h):
Pull the button and hold without interruption un-
til the convertible top is in the final position and
the message on the on-board computer goes
out.
In case of danger, release the button.
Convertible top operation stops.
f From 6 mph (10 km/h) to 30 mph
(50 km/h):
Pull the button briefly, the convertible top clo-
ses automatically. The message in on-board
computer goes out.
In case of danger, push the button forward
again, the convertible top operation stops.

184 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emergency operation Warning!
There is a danger of injury and risk of dama-
f Before performing emergency operation,
ge during emergency operation.
please check:
There is a danger of crushing or pinching
Was the ignition switched on and the hand-
body parts at all moveable convertible top
brake applied?
parts which could cause serious personal
Are the electrical fuses defective?
injury.
Please see the chapter “ELECTRICAL SYS-
TEM” on Page 245. f Take great care when performing emergency
operation.
f Do not operate the convertible top during and
after emergency operation.
f Lever off joint rods only with the greatest care.
f If the convertible top is not in the rearward final
position, the convertible-top compartment lid
or the convertible top could fall down when the
joint rods are levered off.
Locking the convertible top For this reason, hold convertible top or conver-
f Swivel latching lever B to the front until it is felt tible-top compartment lid firmly before levering
to engage. off the second joint rod.
The locking hook C must engage in the f During emergency operation, ensure that the
receptacle on the windshield frame. paint is not damaged.

Note
If the convertible top has been opened for a longer
period, it could be necessary to assist the locking
hook C engage.
f With the vehicle stationary, press and hold the
button for convertible top operation and pull
the convertible top to the windshield using the
handle recess D.

Mobile Roofs 185

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Warning!
Danger of crushing or pinching.
f Lever off joint rods only with the greatest care.
f If the convertible top is not in the rearward final
position, the convertible-top compartment lid
or the convertible top could fall down when the
joint rods are levered off.
For this reason, hold convertible top or conver-
tible-top compartment lid firmly before levering
off the second joint rod.

1. Remove the ignition key so that the convertible 3. Take lever B out of the tool kit.
top is not operated unintentionally.
2. On both sides of the car, unclip the black rod
cover A and pull it up and out.

186 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Example: Convertible top in rearward final position 4. Lever joint rod D (black fastening) off the ball 6. Grasp convertible-top compartment cover in
D - Joint rod for convertible-top compartment cover
head with blade of lever B. the center and set up completely (arrow).
(black ball head fastening)
E - Joint rod for convertible top As the connection is under spring tension, a
7. Lever joint rod E (white fastening) off the ball
(white ball head fastening) corresponding amount of force is required to
head with blade of lever B.
lever off the ball head, creating danger of
A corresponding amount of force is required to
The position and accessibility of the joint rods crushing and pinching.
lever off the ball head, creating danger of
change depending on the position of the conver-
5. When levering off joint rod D on the other side crushing and pinching.
tible top. It can be helpful to fold up the rear part
of the vehicle, the convertible-top compart-
of the convertible top. 8. When levering off joint rod E on the other side
ment cover must be held so that it does not fall
of the vehicle, the convertible top must be held
down in an uncontrolled manner to protect
so that it does not fall down in an uncontrolled
against injury from a fallen cover.
manner to protect against injury from a fallen
cover.

Mobile Dächer 187

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Caution!
Danger of damage at the convertible top.
f After emergency operation, do not operate the
convertible top with the rocker switch.
f Drive slowly to an authorized Porsche dealer in
order to have the fault remedied.

9. Lift convertible top with both hands (arrow)

and close.
10.Lock convertible top.
11.Carefully lower convertible-top compartment
cover.

188 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Windstop
f Make sure that all windstop parts are fastened
securely, especially when driving with the con-
vertible top open.

Note
When the convertible top is closed, it is a good
idea to remove the center section of the windstop
to permit good ventilation of the interior or for
demisting the rear window.
This is particularly the case in cold, wet weather.

Removing outer windstop parts Removing central section of windstop

parts
f Press windstop parts to the rear and up out of
the roll-over bar and take it out. f Press release buttons B and take out the wind-
stop toward the rear.
Installing outer windstop parts
Installing center section of windstop
f First insert the windstop parts in the roll-over
bar from the rear, then push it up into the bar. f First insert the windstop in receiver C from the
rear, then, one after the other, press forward
f Make sure that the three plastic tongues A fully
until both upper mounts B engage audibly.
engage in the roll-over bar.

Mobile Roofs 189

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hardtop
Since the convertible top stays open for a long
time, it must be absolutely dry and clean before
being opened.
This prevents damp stains and abrasion damage.
Your autorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
advise you about correct hardtop storage.

Note
The inserts for locking of the pivot locks are not
installed on vehicles delivered without a hardtop.
It is essential to have the necessary parts retrofit-
ted by an authorized Porsche dealer before a
hardtop is fitted for the first time.

Fitting the hardtop 3. Pull off cover A on the roll-over bar.

1. Open doors and convertible top.

2. Carefully remove both plastic covers (arrow)
out of the pivot locks, using a screwdriver.
Store plastic covers.

Note
These plastic covers are included with vehicles
that are factory-equipped with a hardtop.

190 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Remove the connector of the convertible top 5. Remove cover from front locking lever 6. Press red locking button of the front locking
heated rear window and insert into the rear (arrow). lever (arrow A).
empty socket. Open latch completely (arrow B).

Mobile Roofs 191

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7. Put both pivot locks in the opening position on 8. With one person on each side, grasp hardtop 10.Lower hardtop at rear.
the hardtop. and carefully lift over the car. The pivot locks must be completely sunken
The handles must point inwards. into the locks (arrow A).
9. Insert hardtop front into the sockets on the
If necessary, move latching lever slightly.
windshield frame.
11.Swing both latching levers B to the rear until
Warning! they can be felt to engage.
Danger of pinching fingers or hands.
f Evenly lower the hardtop at both sides.

192 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Caution!
Risk of damage due to inadvertent operation
of the convertible top when the hardtop is
fitted.
f Make sure that front locking lever A is always
correctly locked.
This disables the convertible-top drive.

13.Fit cover on the front locking lever.

14.Insert the plug of the hardtop heated rear win-
dow into the socket.

12.Swing locking lever of front latch to the rear

(arrow A).
The locking hook must engage in the wind-
shield frame (arrow B).
When the hardtop is correctly latched, the
white marking stripe on the red locking button
(arrow C) must be visible.

Mobile Roofs 193

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Removing the hardtop
1.Make sure that the hardtop is placed on a
clean, soft surface.
2.Open doors.
3.Remove cover from the front locking lever.
4.Open front latch.
5.Open rear pivot locks (swivel inwards).
Unplug plug of the hardtop heated rear win-
dow.
6.With one person on each side, grasp the hard-
top.
Lift hardtop at rear and pull out of the sockets
on the windshield frame at front.

Warning!
11.Swivel the sash guide of the seat belt forward.
Danger of pinching fingers or hands. Insert the lower retaining lugs of the cover
from above and clip in the upper retaining lugs
f Evenly lift the hardtop at both sides.
on the bar.
7.Carefully lift the hardtop up and off the vehicle
to the rear.
8.Close front hardtop latch.
Fit cover on the front latch.
9.Close pivot locks on the vehicle with the plastic
covers.
10.Remove the connector of the convertible top
heated rear window from the empty socket
and insert into the socket.

194 Mobile Roofs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance, Car Care
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle ......................................... 196
Coolant Level ............................................ 197
Engine Oil ................................................ 199
Engine Oil Level ....................................... 199
Engine Oil Recommendation ....................... 200
Brake Fluid Level ....................................... 202
Fuel Economy ........................................... 204
Operating your Porsche in other Countries .. 204
Fuel Recommendations .............................. 206
Portable Fuel Containers ........................... 207
Fuel Evaporation Control ........................... 207
Emission Control System ........................... 208
How Emission Control Works ..................... 209
Washer Fluid ............................................. 210
Power Steering ......................................... 211
Air Filter ................................................... 211
Combination Filter ..................................... 211
Fluids/Oils for Manual Transmission
and Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ............ 211
Wiper Blades ........................................... 212
Car Care Instructions ................................ 213

Maintenance, Car Care 195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Exercise Extreme Caution when f In particular, be very careful to ensure that f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.), the battery or fuel.
Working on your Vehicle jewelry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot get Keep a fire extinguisher in close reach.
caught in the engine-compartment blower, fan,
Danger! f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause
belts or other moving parts.
problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
Ignoring the following instructions may The radiator and radiator fans are in the front
about any servicing, have it done by your
cause serious personal injury or death. of the car.
authorized Porsche dealer.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted in
f The engine compartment of any motor vehicle the engine-compartment.
Improper maintenance during the warranty
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not period may affect your Porsche warranty cov-
The fans can start or continue running as a
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do erage.
function of temperature, even with the engine
not attempt the adjustments described on the switched off. f Supplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid or
following pages. Carry out work in these areas only with the en- coolant, are hazardous to your health.
This caution also applies to the entire vehicle. gine off, the ignition switched off, and exercise Keep these fluids out of children’s reach and
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well extreme caution. dispose of them in accordance with the appro-
priate regulations.
ventilated area. f Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic ig-
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the nition system. When the ignition is on, high f Some countries require additional tools and
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel voltage is present in all wires connected with special spare parts to be carried in your vehi-
fumes might be present. Be especially cau- the ignition system; therefore, exercise ex- cle.
tious of such devices such as hot water heat- treme caution when working on any part of the Please make enquiries before driving abroad.
ers which ignite a flame intermittently. engine while the ignition is on or the engine is
running.
f Before working on any part in the engine com-
partment, turn the engine off and let it cool f Always support your car with safety stands if it
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment is necessary to work under the car.
components can burn skin on contact. f When working under the car without safety
f Be alert and cautious around engine at all stands but with the wheels on the ground,
times while the engine is running. make sure the car is on level ground, the
If work has to be performed with the engine wheels are blocked, and that the engine
running, always set the parking brake, and cannot be started.
make sure the shift lever is in neutral position Remove the ignition key.
or the PDK selector lever in position P or N.

196 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Coolant Level Topping off coolant
f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME Warning!
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on Page 196. Danger of serious personal injury or death
from scalding. Coolant is hazardous to your
The cooling system is filled at the factory with a health, and may be fatal if swallowed.
permanent coolant.
It provides year-round protection from corrosion f Do not open the cap of the expansion tank
and freezing down to –31 °F/–35 °C. while the engine is hot.

f Only use antifreeze authorized by Porsche. f Allow the engine to cool down before opening
the cap and protect your hands, arms and face
from any possible escape of hot coolant.
Checking coolant level
f Keep coolant out of children’s reach.
The expansion tank with its filler orifice is located
f Also, keep coolant away from your pets.
in the rear luggage compartment under the serv-
They can be attracted to it should there be a
ice flap.
spill, or to used coolant left in an open contai-
f Check the coolant level regularly. ner. Coolant can be deadly to pets if consu- 2. Open the service flap by pulling the handhold.
med.
When the engine is cold and the car is level the 3. Cover the expansion tank cap with a thick rag.
fluid level must lie between the “MIN” and “MAX” Risk of damage from overflowing coolant. Open cap slowly and carefully and allow over-
markings.
f Take care while topping off coolant not to soil pressure to escape.
the luggage compartment or items of luggage. Then unscrew cap completely.
4. Only add a mixture of antifreeze and water in
1. Switch engine off and let it cool. equal parts, and do not exceed the ”Max.“
Please see the chapter “COOLING SYSTEM” on mark.
Page 88.
Antifreeze in coolant:
50% gives protection down to –31 °F/–35 °C
60% gives protection down to –58 °F/–50 °C
5. Screw cap firmly on.
6. Close service flap.

Maintenance, Car Care 197

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 If in an emergency pure water has been added, the Engine-compartment blower,
mix ratio must be corrected at an authorized radiator fan
Porsche dealer.
The radiator and radiator fans are in the front of
Marked loss of coolant indicates leakage in the
the car.
cooling system.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted in the
The cause should immediately be remedied at an
engine compartment.
authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning!
Risk of injury.
After the engine is switched off, the engine-
compartment temperature is monitored for
approx. 30 minutes.
During this period, and depending on tem-
perature, the engine-compartment blower
may continue to run or start to run.
f Carry out work in these areas only with the en-
gine off, the ignition off, and exercise extreme
caution.
Risk of injury. The radiator fans in the front
end of the car may be operating or
unexpectedly start operating when the
engine is switched on.
f Carry out work in these areas only with the en-
gine switched off.

198 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine Oil If the vehicle is driven at a high rate of speed, Engine Oil Level
climatic conditions are warm, and the load is high,
It is important to perform oil changes regularly in the oil should be checked more frequently, as f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
accordance with the intervals specified in the driving conditions will determine the rate of oil CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
“Maintenance” booklet. consumption. on Page 196.

Engine oil consumption – The engine in your vehicle depends on oil to f Regularly check the oil level using the on-board
lubricate and cool all of its moving parts. computer after the vehicle is refuelled.
It is normal for your engine to consume oil. Therefore, the engine oil should be checked Please see the chapter “OIL DISPLAY AND
The rate of oil consumption depends on the quality regularly and kept at the required level. MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
and viscosity of oil, the speed at which the engine on Page 157.
is operated, the climate, road conditions as well – Make it a habit to have the engine oil level
as the amount of dilution and oxidation of the checked at every fuel filling. The difference between the minimum and maxi-
lubricant. mum marks on the segment display is approx.
– The oil pressure warning light is not an oil level
1.3 quarts (1.25 liters).
If the vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and indicator.
Each segment of the display corresponds to ap-
consumes a normal amount of oil, the engine oil The oil pressure warning light indicates serious
prox. 0.42 quart (0.4 liter).
measurement may not show any drop in the oil engine damage may be occuring when lit, if en-
level at all, even after 600 miles (1,000 km) or gine rpm is above idle speed.
more. This is because the oil is gradually becom-
ing diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear
that the oil level has not changed.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the
vehicle is driven at high speeds, as on an express-
way, making it then appear that oil is excessively
consumed after driving at high speeds.
If the conditions you drive your vehicle in are
dusty, humid, or hot, the frequency of the oil
change intervals should be greater.

Maintenance, Car Care 199

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Topping off engine oil Engine Oil Recommendation
Warning! Porsche recommends .

Engine oil is hazardous to your health and The right oil for your vehicle.
may be fatal if swallowed.
Complies with Viscosity class2)
f Keep engine oil out of children’s reach. approval1)
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have Porsche A40 SAE 0W - 403)
caused cancer in laboratory animals. SAE 5W - 404)
SAE 5W - 504)
f Always protect your skin by washing thorough-
ly with soap and water. 1) Generally, you can find details of the
manufacturer approvals on the oil containers or as
a notice displayed by the retailer.
Caution!
The current approval status is also available from
Risk of damage from overflowing engine oil. your Porsche partner.
f Take care while checking and topping up 2) SAE viscosity class - Example: SAE 0W - 40
engine oil not to soil the luggage compartment 3. Open the service flap by pulling the handhold. Specification 0W = Viscosity specification for
or items of luggage. low temperatures (winter).
4. Unscrew the oil filler cap. Specification 40 = Viscosity specification for
Note 5. Add at most 0.5 quarts (0.5 liter) of engine oil high temperatures.
at a time. 3) For all temperature ranges.
The Check Engine warning light may light up if the
Never add more engine oil than required
cap of the oil filler opening is opened while the 4) For the temperature range over --13 °F (--
to reach the max. mark.
engine is running. 25 °C).
6. Close oil filler cap until you feel it reach its end
The oil inlet opening is located in the rear luggage
position.
compartment under the service flap.
7. Measure oil level again with the on-board
1. Measure the oil level and read off the required
computer. Switch off the engine.
top-up quantity on the on-board computer.
8. If necessary, repeat the process and add more
2. Switch off the engine.
engine oil as required.

200 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Always observe the following points: All current engine oils are compatible with each Viscosity
other, i.e. when making an oil change it is not nec-
– Use engine oils approved by Porsche only. This
essary to flush the engine if you wish to use a dif- Like all liquids, engine oil is viscous when cold,
is a precondition for optimum and problem-free
ferent brand or grade of oil. and thin-bodied when warm. The viscosity of an oil
operation of your vehicle.
Since, however, each brand of oil has a special is expressed by its SAE class. For cold viscosity
– Regular oil changes are part of servicing. composition, you should, if possible, use the (measured at temperatures below 32 °F/0 °C) the
It is important that the service intervals, same oil brand if it becomes necessary to top up SAE class is given as a number and the letter “W”
particularly the oil change intervals, are between oil changes. (as in winter), for hot viscosity (measured at
observed in accordance with the specifications 212 °F/100 °C) the SAE class is given only as a
Porsche engines have long intervals between oil
in the “Maintenance” booklet. number.
changes. You can make best use of these long oil
– Oils approved by Porsche can be mixed with change intervals by using multigrade oils since The viscosity of an oil is, therefore, always the
each other. these are largely independent of seasonal fluctua- same if it has the same number of an SAE class.
tions in temperature.
– Porsche engines are designed so that no oil Oils with two viscosities are called multigrade oils;
additives may be used. If your vehicle is used frequently in stop-and-go oils with only one viscosity are termed single-
traffic in cold weather, the engine will not always grade oils.
– A label is located in the engine compartment,
be properly warmed up.
which provides you with information on suitable Single-grade oils can not be used in your engine.
Condensation from products of combustion may
oil for your engine.
accumulate in the oil. In this case, it is advisable The viscosity of the engine oil for your Porsche
Your Porsche partner will be pleased to to change the oil more frequently so that your has to be chosen according to the ambient tem-
advise you. engine once again has 100% efficient engine oil. perature given in the engine oil recommendation
table.
Oil change Engine oil performance class
The engine oil has to be changed regularly at the Engine oil is not only a lubricant, but also serves
intervals listed in your Maintenance Schedule. to keep the engine clean, to neutralize the dirt
f Please see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
which penetrates into the engine through combus-
tion and to protect the engine against corrosion.
Page 281.
To perform these functions, the oil is provided with
We recommend that you have the engine oil additives which have been specially developed for
changed at your Porsche dealer, who has the re- these functions.
quired oils and the necessary filling equipment. The efficiency of an oil is expressed, for example,
If you suspect an oil leak in the engine have your by the API, ILSAC or ACEA classifications.
dealer check it out immediately.

Maintenance, Car Care 201

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Brake Fluid Level
f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on Page 196.
f Use only new (unused) Original Porsche
brake fluid.

Warning!
Brake fluid is hazardous to your health, and
may be fatal if swallowed.
Brake fluid also attacks paintwork.
f Keep brake fluid out of children’s reach.
f Take care while topping off brake fluid not to
soil the luggage compartment or items of lug-
gage.
Checking the brake fluid level A slight decrease in the fluid level due to wear and
automatic readjustment of the disc brakes is
The reservoir for the hydraulic braking and clutch normal.
systems is located in the luggage compartment. If, however, the fluid level falls markedly or below
the minimum mark, the braking system may have
1. Open and remove cover flap A. developed a leak.
2. Regularly check the brake-fluid level on the f Have the brake system checked without delay
transparent expansion tank through the at an authorized Porsche dealer.
window B.
The fluid level should always lie between the
minimum and maximum marks.

202 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Changing the brake fluid Warning light USA
Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over
time. This accumulation of water lowers the boil- Warning light Canada
ing point and, under certain operating conditions,
can affect the braking performance. – The warning lights on the instrument panel and
Therefore have the brake fluid changed in accord- on the on-board computer indicate an insuffi-
ance with the change intervals stated in the cient brake fluid level.
brochure “Maintenance”.
– If the warning light lights up on the instrument
panel and the warning message appears on
the on-board computer in combination with a
larger pedal travel, a brake circuit may have
failed.

If the warning lights should light up when

driving:
f Stop immediately in a suitable place.
f Do not continue driving.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.

Maintenance, Car Care 203

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fuel Economy f Any additional weight carried in the vehicle re- Operating your Porsche in other
duces fuel economy. Always keep cargo to a
Fuel economy will vary depending on where, minimum and remove all unnecessary items.
Countries
when and how you drive, optional equipment f Organize your trips to take in several errands Government regulations in the United States and
installed, and the general condition of your in one trip. Canada require that automobiles meet specific
car. emission regulations and safety standards. There-
A car tuned to specifications and correctly f All electrical accessories contribute to in- fore, cars built for the U.S. and Canada differ from
maintained, will help you to achieve optimal creased fuel consumption. vehicles sold in other countries.
fuel economy. f Only switch on the air conditioning when neces- If you plan to take your Porsche outside the conti-
f Have your vehicle tuned to specifications. sary. nental limits of the United States or Canada, there
Air cleaner should be dirt free to allow proper f Do not drive with the Roof Transport System is the possibility that
engine “breathing”. mounted unless you need it.
Battery should be fully charged. – unleaded fuel may not be available;
Wheels should be properly aligned. The EPA estimated mpg. is to be used for – unleaded fuel may have a considerably lower
Tires should be inflated at correct pressure. comparison purposes, actual mileage may octane rating. Excessive engine knock and se-
f Always monitor your fuel consumption. be different from the estimated mpg., rious damage to both engine and catalytic con-
depending on your driving speed, weather verters could result;
f Drive smoothly, avoid abrupt changes in speed conditions and trip length. Your actual
as much as possible. – service may be inadequate due to lack of prop-
highway mileage will probably be less than er service facilities, tools or diagnostic equip-
f Avoid jack rabbit starts and sudden stops. the estimated mpg. ment;
f Do not drive longer than necessary in the lower f Please observe all local and national speed
– replacement parts may not be available or very
gears. Shifting into a higher gear early without limits.
difficult to get.
lugging the engine will help save fuel.
Porsche cannot be responsible for the
f Prolonged “warm up” idling wastes gas. Start
mechanical damage that could result
the vehicle just before you are ready to drive.
because of inadequate fuel, service or parts
Accelerate slowly and smoothly.
availability.
f Switch off the engine if stationary for longer
If you purchased your Porsche abroad and want to
periods.
bring it back home, be sure to find out about ship-
ping and forwarding requirements, as well as cur-
rent import and customs regulations.

204 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fuel
Warning!
Fuel is highly flammable and harmful to
health.
f Fire, open flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling fuel.
f Avoid contact with skin or clothing.
f Do not inhale fuel vapors.
To prevent damage to the emission control
system and engine:
f Never drive the tank completely out of fuel.
f Avoid high cornering speeds after the warning
lights have come on.
– refueling with engine running. If there is a defect in the automatic unlocking
f Please see the chapter “FUEL ECONOMY” on system:
Page 204.
Please see the chapter “EMISSION CONTROL Opening the filler flap f Open the passenger door.
SYSTEM” on Page 208. f Pull the ring in the right-hand door aperture
The filler opening is under the filler flap in the front
Please see the chapter “LEVEL GAGE” on (arrow).
right fender.
Page 126.
f With the vehicle unlocked, press on the front
Check engine warning light part of the filler flap (arrow) to open the flap.
If the warning lights in the instrument panel and on- The filler flap is centrally locked along with the oth-
board computer come on and remain on while er locks.
driving, it suggests:
– a potential engine control problem and the
need for system service or
– an improperly fastened tank cap or

Maintenance, Car Care 205

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1. Important: Stop the engine and switch off the Fuel Recommendations
ignition.
Your Porsche is equipped with catalytic convert-
2. Slowly unscrew the tank cap.
ers and must use UNLEADED FUEL ONLY.
Hang the tank cap's plastic strap on the hook
on the inside wall of the filler flap. Your engine is designed to provide optimum per-
formance and fuel economy using unleaded premi-
3. Insert fuel-hose nozzle fully into the filler neck
um fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON
with the handle of the fuel-hose nozzle facing
(93 CLC or AKI). Porsche therefore recom-
down.
mends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
4. Do not add further fuel once the correctly op-
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not
erated automatic fuel-hose nozzle has
always be available. Be assured that your vehicle
switched off.
will operate properly on unleaded premium fuels
Fuel could spray or could run over in warm
with octane numbers of at least 95 RON
temperatures.
(90 CLC or AKI), since the engine’s “Electronic
5. Replace the tank cap immediately after Oktane™ knock control” will adapt the ignition tim-
refueling and turn it until you hear it and feel it ing, if necessary.
engage.
It is important to observe the regular service inter-
Refueling vals, and particularly the oil change intervals,
If you lose the tank cap, you must replace it
Fuel tank capacity is listed under “Capacities”. only with an original part to reduce the specified in the “Maintenance” booklet.
Porsche does not recommend the use of fuel ad- possibility of a fire in the event of a collision.
The use of UNLEADED FUEL ONLY is critically
ditives.
important to the life of the catalytic
Caution! converters. Deposits from leaded fuels will
Fuel is highly flammable and harmful to
health. Risk of damage. Decorative film may fade if it ruin the converters and make it ineffective
comes into contact with fuel. as an emission control device.
f Please see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Page 281. f Wipe off any emerging fuel immediately. Cars with catalytic converters have a smaller fuel
tank opening, and gas station pumps have smaller
nozzles. This will prevent accidental pumping of
leaded fuel into cars with catalytic converters.

206 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Unleaded fuels may not be available outside the Fuels containing ethanol Fuel Evaporation Control
continental U.S. and Canada. Therefore, we rec-
ommend you do not take your car to areas or Do not use any fuels containing more than 10 per-
countries where unleaded fuel may not be availa- cent ethanol by volume. Fuel tank venting
ble.
We recommend, however, to change to a different The evaporation chamber and the carbon canister
fuel or station if any of the following problems oc- prevent fuel from escaping to the atmosphere at
Octane ratings cur with your vehicle: extreme high outside temperatures, when driving
abruptly around curves and when the car is parked
Octane rating indicates a fuel’s ability to resist det- – Deterioration of driveability and performance.
at an incline or in any other nonlevel position.
onation. Therefore, buying the correct octane gas – Substantially reduced fuel economy.
is important to prevent engine “damage”.
– Vapor lock and non-start problems, especially Vapor control system and storage
The RON octane rating is based on the research at high altitude or at high temperature.
method. The CLC (U.S. Cost of Living Council oc- When the fuel tank is filled, vapors are collected in
tane rating) or AKI (antiknock index) octane rating – Engine malfunction or stalling. the evaporation chamber by a vent line leading the
usually displayed on U.S. fuel pumps is calculated vapors to the carbon canister where they are
as research octane number plus motor octane stored as long as the engine does not run.
number, divided by 2, that is written as:
Portable Fuel Containers
Danger!
Purge system
RON+MON or R+M
2 2 Portable fuel containers, full or partially When the engine is running, the fuel vapors from
empty, may leak causing an explosion, or re- the canister will be mixed with fresh air from the
The CLC or AKI octane rating is usually lower than sult in fire in case of an accident. ambient air of the canister. This mixture will be
directed to the intake air housing by the tank vent
the RON rating: f Never carry additional fuel in portable contain-
line, mixed with the intake air and burned during
For example: 95 RON equals 90 CLC or AKI ers in your vehicle.
normal combustion.

Maintenance, Car Care 207

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emission Control System To assure efficient operation of the Emission Parking
Control System:
In the interest of clean air f Have your vehicle maintained properly and in Warning!
accordance with the recommendations de- Danger of fire resulting in serious personal
Pollution of our environment has become a prob- scribed in your Maintenance Booklet. injury or death.
lem that is of increasing concern to all of us. We Lack of proper maintenance, as well as im-
urge you to join us in our efforts for cleaner air in proper use of the vehicle, will impair the func- f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
controlling the pollutants emitted from the auto- tion of the emission control system and could where the hot exhaust system may come in
mobile. lead to damage. contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or oth-
er flammable material.
Porsche has developed an emission control sys- f Do not alter or remove any component of the
tem that controls or reduces those parts of the emission control system. f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
emission that can be harmful to our environment. the fire department.
f Do not alter or remove any device, such as Do not endanger your life by attempting to put
Your Porsche is equipped with such a system.
heat shields, switches, ignition wires, valves, out the fire.
Porsche warrants the Emission Control System in etc., which are designed to protect your vehi-
your new car under the terms and conditions set cle’s emission control system.
forth in the Warranty Booklet. In addition to serious engine damage, this can Undercoating
result in a fire if excess raw fuel reaches the
You, as the owner of the vehicle, have the
exhaust system. Danger!
responsibility to provide regular maintenance serv-
ice for the vehicle and to keep a record of all main- f Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you Danger of fire resulting in serious personal
tenance work performed. To facilitate record detect engine misfire or other unusual operat- injury or death.
keeping, have the service performed by author- ing conditions.
f Do not apply additional undercoating or rust-
ized Porsche dealers. They have Porsche trained
proofing on or near the exhaust manifold,
technicians and special tools to provide fast and
exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
efficient service.
shields. During driving the substance used for
undercoating could overheat and ignite.

208 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 How Emission Control Works Oxygen sensor The catalytic converters will be damaged by:
– push or tow starting the vehicle
When an automobile engine is running, it uses en- The oxygen sensor, installed in the exhaust pipe
ergy generated through the combustion of a mix- continuously senses the oxygen content of the – misfiring of the engine
ture of air and fuel. Depending on whether a car is exhaust and signals the information to an electron-
– turning off the ignition while the vehicle is mov-
driven fast or slowly or whether the engine is cold ic control unit. The control unit corrects the air/
ing or
or hot, some of the fuel (hydrocarbons) may not fuel ratio, so the engine always receives an accu-
be burned completely, but may be discharged into rately metered air/fuel mixture. – driving until the fuel tank is completely empty
the engine crankcase or exhaust system. Additon-
– by other unusual operating conditions.
al hydrocarbons may enter the atmosphere Crankcase ventilation
through evaporation of fuel from the fuel tank. f Do not continue to operate your vehicle under
These hydrocarbons (HC), when released into the Through crankcase ventilation, undesirable emis- these conditions, since raw fuel might reach
air, contribute to undesirable pollution. sions from the engine crankcase are not permit- the catalytic converters. This could result in
ted to reach the outside atmosphere. These emis- overheating of the converters. Federal law pro-
In addition, carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of
sions are recirculated from the crankcase to the hibits use of leaded fuel in this car.
nitrogen (NOx) contribute to engine emissions.
They, too, are formed during the combustion proc- air intake system. From here the emissions mix
ess and discharged into the exhaust system. with the intake air and are later burned in the en-
gine.
To reduce these pollutants, your Porsche is
equipped with a precisely calibrated fuel injection
Catalytic converters
system to assure a finely balanced air/fuel mixture
under all operating conditions. The catalytic converters are efficient “clean-up”
devices built into the exhaust system of the vehi-
cle. The catalytic converters burn the undesirable
pollutants in the exhaust gas before it is released
into the atmosphere.

The exclusive use of unleaded fuel is critical-

ly important for the life of the catalytic con-
verters. Therefore, only unleaded fuel must
be used.

Maintenance, Car Care 209

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Clean water is generally not enough to clean the Topping off washer fluid
windshield and headlights. Depending on the
1. Please note all the information on the refill con-
season, mix the water with the appropriate
tainer of the cleaning agent.
additives. Follow the instructions for the mixture
ratio. 2. Open cap of the washer-fluid reservoir (arrow).
Only use window cleaner concentrate which meets 3. Top up washer fluid and close cap properly.
the following requirements.
f Do not use engine coolant anti-freeze or any
– Dilutability 1:100 other solution that can damage the car’s paint,
in the washer reservoir.
– Phosphate-free
– Suitable for plastic headlight lenses. Warning light
We recommend window cleaner concentrates If less than 0.53 quarts (0.5 liter) remains, a
approved by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche warning message appears on the on-board
dealer will be pleased to advise you. computer.
Summer filling f Add washer fluid.

Washer Fluid Water + window cleaner concentrate at the mixing

ratio indicated on the container.

Capacity Winter filling

– Without headlight cleaning system: Water + antifreeze protection + window cleaner
approximately 2.6 quarts (2.5 liters). concentrate at the mixing ratio indicated on the
container.
– With headlight cleaning system:
approximately 6.3 quarts (6 liters). f Please note all the information on the contain-
ers of the window cleaner concentrate or the
antifreeze protection.
Washer fluid
The reservoir, with a blue screw cap, is in the front
luggage compartment, to the rear left.

210 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Power Steering Air Filter Fluids/Oils for Manual
A dirty air filter not only reduces engine perform-
Transmission and Porsche
Warning!
ance, but can lead to premature engine wear. Doppelkupplung (PDK)
Risk of accident resulting in serious personal
Regular filter replacement is part of the routine The transmission fluids/oils have to be checked
injury or death.
maintenance service. and changed at the intervals listed in your Mainte-
When the engine is stopped (e.g. when being
f In dusty conditions, check the filter element
towed) or the hydraulic system fails, there is nance Schedule.
no assistance for steering. more frequently and replace if necessary. f Please see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Therefore, substantially more force will have Page 281.
to be exerted in order to steer. Combination Filter
Do not tow the car or run the engine without fluid/
f Exercise great care when being towed. The fresh air passing through the combination fil- oil in the transmission. The transmission may be
ter into the passenger compartment is virtually
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest autho- damaged by even a tiny speck of dirt, only a clean
free of dust, pollen, and unpleasant odors. funnel or spout must be used when adding fluid/
rized Porsche dealer.
f If the outside air is polluted by exhaust fumes, oil.

Note press the circulating-air button. We recommend that you have the fluids/oils
A dirty filter can be the cause of reduced air flow: changed at your Porsche dealer, who has the re-
The flow noise heard at full steering lock is system quired lubricants and the necessary filling equip-
related and does not indicate a defect in the f Have filter replaced by your authorized ment.
steering system. Porsche dealer.
f If you suspect an oil leak in the transmission,
Regular filter replacement is part of the routine have your authorized Porsche dealer check it
Checking hydraulic fluid maintenance service. out immediately.
f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on Page 196.
The hydraulic fluid reservoir is located in the engi-
ne compartment.
Regular checking of hydraulic fluid is part of
servicing.

Maintenance, Car Care 211

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Wiper Blades If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this can be as a Changing windshield wiper blades
result of the following:
f Please read the separate instructions for fitting
Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital
– If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wiper blades as supplied by the manufacturer.
for a clear view.
wash, wax residues may adhere to the wind-
f We recommend that you get your authorized
f Replace the wiper blades twice per year (be- shield. These wax residues can be removed
Porsche dealer to replace the wiper blades.
fore and after the cold season) or whenever only by using window cleaner concentrate.
wiper performance deteriorates.
– The wiper blades may be damaged or worn. Caution!
Caution! f Replace damaged or worn wiper blades as Risk of damage.
soon as possible. If the wiper blades are not changed properly, they
Risk of damage if the wiper arm accidentally
falls back on to the window. f Please see the chapter “WASHER FLUID” on can come loose when the car is moving.
Page 210. f Check that the wiper blades are seated
f Always hold the wiper arm securely when re-
placing the wiper blade. f Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer securely. The wiper blades must engage
for further information. properly in the wiper arm.
Risk of damage if wiper blades that are fro-
zen in place are loosened improperly.
f Thaw the wiper blades before loosening them.

Maintenance note
f Periodically clean the wiper blades with win-
dow cleaner, especially after the vehicle has
been washed in a car wash.
We recommend the Porsche window cleaner. If
they are very dirty (e.g. with insect remains),
they can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth.

212 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Car Care Instructions f Keep cleaning agents out of reach from chil- High-pressure cleaning units, steam
dren. cleaners
f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
f Observe all caution labels.
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE” Warning!
on Page 196. f Always read directions on the container before
using any product. These directions may con- High-pressure cleaning units or steam clea-
Regular and correct care helps to maintain tain information necessary to avoid personal ners can damage the following components:
the value of your car and is also a injury. – tires,
precondition for the New Vehicle Warranty
and the Anti Corrosion Warranty. f Do not use fuel, kerosene, naphtha, nail polish – logos, emblems,
remover or other volatile cleaning fluids. They
may be toxic, flammable or hazardous in other – painted surfaces,
Your authorized Porsche dealer has specially
developed car-care products from the ways. Only use spot removing fluids in a well – alternator,
Porsche program available either singly or vented area.
– ParkAssist sensors,
as complete car-care sets. They will be f Do not clean the underside of chassis, fend-
pleased to help you select suitable products. – convertible top.
ers, wheel covers, etc., without protecting
your hands and arms as you may cut yourself f Please observe the operating instructions from
Whether you use Porsche products or other
on sharp-edged metal parts. the unit manufacturer.
commercially available cleaning agents first
make sure of their correct application. f When cleaning with a flat-jet nozzle or the like,
Moisture and road salt on brakes may affect brak-
maintain a minimum distance of 20 inches (50
A Porsche that is well-cared for can look like new ing efficiency.
cm).
for years. It all depends on the amount of care the
f Test the brakes after each vehicle washing.
owner is willing to give the car. f Never use high-pressure cleaning units or
Decorative film steam cleaners with a round-jet nozzle. A high-
Warning! pressure cleaning unit or steam cleaners with
Caution! round nozzle will damage your vehicle.
Risk of serious personal injury or damage to
the vehicle or property. Risk of damage due to separation of the f The tires are particularly susceptible to dam-
Cleaning agents may be hazardous to your decorative film when cleaning your vehicle with age.
health. high-pressure cleaning equipment or steam f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of
Most chemical cleaners are concentrates cleaners. the aforementioned components.
which require dilution. High concentrations
might cause problems ranging from irritation f Do not use high-pressure cleaning equipment
to serious injury as well as damage to your or steam cleaners for cleaning decorative film.
vehicle.

Maintenance, Car Care 213

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Washing f After washing, rinse the car with plenty of wa- The following parts are particularly
ter and then dry with a chamois leather. susceptible to damage:
The best method of protecting your car from the Do not use the same chamois leather for dry-
– Convertible top (hot wax treatment cannot be
damaging effects of the environment is frequent ing as you use for cleaning the windshield and
used, as the wax attacks the convertible top
washing and the application of a preservative. The windows.
material)
underside of your vehicle should also be thorough-
ly washed for cinders, salt or sanding at winter’s Warning! – Windshield wipers (always switch them off to
end. prevent them wiping unintentionally in intermit-
Moisture which gets on to the brakes during tent or sensor operation)
The longer salt, road dust and industrial dust, a car wash can reduce braking efficiency or
dead insects, bird droppings or substances from make the brakes pull unevenly which could – External antennas (always unscrew)
trees (resin, pollen) are allowed to remain on the increase the danger of an accident, causing – Rear spoiler
bodywork, the more serious is their harmful ef- serious personal injuries or death.
fect. – Wheels (the wider the rim and the lower the tire
f After washing the car, test the brakes and height, the greater the risk of damage)
New cars should be washed carefully with plenty steering and briefly brake the discs dry.
of clear water to protect the new paint work. Dark When doing this, take care not to hamper other – High-gloss wheels (to prevent these from get-
paint finishes show up the smallest of surface road users behind you (traffic conditions ting scratched, do not clean with the wheel-
damage (e.g., scratches) more readily than lighter permitting). cleaning brushes of the car wash).
colors.
f Please consult the operator before using auto-
Dark colors are also more susceptible to scratch- Automatic car washes matic car washes.
ing because of the composition of their pigments
f Please see the chapter “WIPER BLADES” on f Wash and dry by hand all points not reached by
and require particularly careful paint care.
Page 212. a car wash, such as door and lid seams or
f Do not wash your car in bright sunlight or while door sills.
Optional add-on parts or parts which project
the bodywork is still hot.
beyond the contours of the vehicle may be Note
f When washing by hand, use abundant water, a damaged by design features (e.g. brushes) of au-
soft sponge or wash brush, and Porsche car tomatic car washes. Automatic car washes spray water at odd angles
shampoo. and high pressures, which are not seen in normal
driving. Therefore, water can sometimes find its
f Begin by spraying the body thoroughly with wa- way into the passengers compartment during or
ter to rinse away loose dirt. shortly after the car wash.

214 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Convertible top Do not wash the convertible top each time the car f Try to remove spots from the convertible-top
is washed. cover by rubbing carefully with a soft rubber
f Never remove snow and ice using a sharp
It is usually sufficient to spray or wash it with clean sponge.
edged object.
water.
Incorrect care and treatment can damage the con-
f Brush dust off the convertible top in the direc- Door lock
vertible top and cause leaks. Any repair work can
tion of the weave using a soft brush.
be done by your authorized Porsche dealer. f To prevent the door lock from freezing during
f Only if there is heavy dirt, wet the convertible the cold season, the lock cylinder should be
Important note top with lukewarm water and the Porsche covered during a wash.
No folding top is 100% leak proof. Wash-Shampoo & convertible-top cleaner, us-
ing a sponge or soft brush, and rub gently. f Should the lock freeze, use an ordinary de-icer.
Due to the constant changing of loads and strains
Rinse Wash-Shampoo & convertible-top clean- In many cases, a well warmed key can help.
to which a car is subject to when driving on roads,
er thoroughly off the convertible top with clean Never use excessive force.
minor wind noise and seepage at joints between
the top, body and doors on convertible tops can- water.
Paint
not be completely sealed in certain areas. There- f After washing it, treat the convertible-top cover
fore small leaks are considered normal for these at least once a year with the special Porsche To protect the paint on your vehicle in the best
models. In addition, your convertible top should convertible-top care product. possible way against mechanical and chemical
not be washed in a car wash. The top may experi- Do not allow the convertible-top care product damage, you should
ence damage by the brushes or may experience to come into contact with paint or windows. If
leaks due to the high pressure water streams di- it does, remove immediately. – preserve it regularly,
rected in areas which would not encounter water
in normal driving conditions. f If there is leakage in the convertible-top cover – polish it if necessary,
or at its seams or folds, the special Porsche – remove spots and stains, and
Cleaning convertible-top care product can be used.
– repair damaged paintwork.
f Please note the information on the container.
Caution! f Do not apply care products containing silicone
f Remove bird droppings immediately since the to the convertible top and windows.
Risk of damage due to the cleaning jet of the acid in them will make the rubber swell and the
high-pressure cleaning equipment or hot wax convertible top will become leaky. General information
treatment.
f Open convertible top only when it is completely f Never rub a dusty vehicle with a dry cloth,
f Do not clean the convertible top with high- dry, otherwise damp stains and scrub marks because the grains of dirt will damage the
pressure cleaning equipment. may occur which cannot be removed. paintwork.
f Do not use the hot wax treatment.

Maintenance, Car Care 215

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f Do not treat matt-painted components with Minor paint damage Caution!
preservatives or polishes, otherwise the matt
f Have minor paint damage, such as scratches, Risk of damage to the alternator.
effect will be lost.
scores or chips caused by flying stones, re-
f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at the al-
paired immediately by your authorized
Preservation ternator, or cover the alternator.
Porsche dealer before corrosion sets in.
The paint surface becomes dull over time due
to weathering. However, if there are already traces of corrosion, Effective rust-proofing is particularly important
they must first be removed carefully and thorough- during the cold weather season. If the vehicle is
f Preserve paint regularly. ly. Coat the area with a rust-proofing primer and driven frequently in areas where salt has been
f Apply paint preservative after washing the finish off with a top coat. The paint code and color spread on the roads, the engine compartment
vehicle and polish it smooth to preserve the number are found on the data bank in the Mainte- should be cleaned thoroughly and subsequently
paintwork. nance booklet. sealed after the cold weather season to prevent
salt from causing any lasting damage.
This keeps the paint shiny and elastic. Dirt is f Please see the chapter “VEHICLE DATA BANK”
prevented from adhering to the paint surface and on Page 274.
industrial dust is prevented from penetrating
Windows
the paint. Engine compartment The road dust which settles on the windshield and
windows contains particles of tire rubber and oil
Polishing The engine compartment and the surface of the
residue. The interior trim and upholstery release
engine are treated with a corrosion-inhibitor at the
Do not resort to using Porsche polish until it be- particles, particularly in strong sunlight, which col-
factory.
comes evident that the normal preservatives no lect on the insides of the windows. These deposits
longer produce the desired finish. If degreasing solvents are used to clean the en- are augmented by impurities in the air which en-
gine compartment or the engine is washed down, ters the car through the fresh air vents.
Spots and stains the process almost invariably removes the corro-
f Clean all windows regularly, inside and outside,
f Remove tar stains, grease, oil spots and dead sion-inhibiting coating. It is then absolutely neces-
with Porsche window cleaner.
insects as soon as possible with Insect Remov- sary to have a durable preservative applied to all
er. They can cause discoloration if allowed to surfaces, body seams, joints and assemblies in f If you use a chamois leather for the windows,
remain on the paintwork. the engine compartment. This also applies when do not use it for paintwork as it will otherwise
corrosion-inhibitor parts are replaced. pick up a certain amount of preservative or
f Wash the affected area immediately after treat- polish and could smear the windows and thus
ing it. impair vision.
f Remove dead insects with Porsche insect re-
mover.

216 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Note – Replace damaged or worn wiper blades imme- shields. During driving the substance used for
diately. undercoating could overheat and ignite.
Door windows feature a water-repellent (hydro-
phobic) coating which prevents soiling of the f Please see the chapter “WASHER FLUID” on
f Before applying fresh underseal, carefully
windows. Page 210.
remove any deposits of dirt and grease. Once
This coating is subject to natural wear and can be
f Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer it has dried, the new undercoating compound
renewed.
for further information. forms a tough protective coating which
f Consult an authorized Porsche dealer. provides efficient rust-proofing of the floor
Undercoating panels and components.
Wiper blades f Always apply a fresh coating of suitable pre-
As it is not possible to exclude the risk of damage servative to unprotected areas after cleaning
Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital to this protective coating in day to day driving, it the underside of the body, the transmission,
for a clear view. is advisable to have the underside of the car in- the engine or carrying out repairs to under-
spected at certain intervals – preferably before
f Please see the chapter “WIPER BLADES” on body, engine or transmission components.
the start of winter and again in spring – and the un-
Page 212.
dercoating restored as necessary. Effective rust-proofing is particularly important
f Replace the wiper blades twice per year (be- during the cold weather season. If your car is driv-
Your authorized Porsche dealer is familiar with the en frequently in areas where salt has been spread
fore and after the cold season) or whenever
bodyseal treatment procedures and has the nec- on the roads, the whole engine compartment
wiper performance deteriorates or the blades
essary equipment for applying factory approved should be cleaned thoroughly after the winter to
are damaged.
materials. We recommend that you entrust them prevent salt from causing any lasting damage. A
f Periodically clean the wiper blades with with such work and inspections. full under-body wash should also be performed at
Porsche window cleaner, especially after the
Unlike conventional spray oils, undercoating and the same time.
vehicle has been washed in a car wash.
rust-proofing compounds based on bitumen or
If they are very dirty (e.g. with insect remains),
wax do not attack the sound-proofing materials ap- Stainless steel exhaust tailpipes
they can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth.
plied at the factory.
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this can be as a Stainless steel exhaust tailpipes can discolor due
result of the following: Warning! to soiling, strong heat, and combustion residues.
– If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car Danger of fire resulting in serious personal The original polish can be achieved again using
wash, residues may adhere to the windshield. injury or death. commercially available metal polishing paste or
These wax residues can be removed only by metal polish.
using window cleaner concentrate. f Do not apply additional undercoating or rust-
proofing on or near the exhaust manifold, ex-
– The wiper blades may be damaged or worn. haust pipes, catalytic converters or heat

Maintenance, Car Care 217

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Light alloy wheels destroy the protective layer on the wheels. Headlights, lights, interior and exterior
We recommend Porsche cleaner for alloy rims. plastic parts, adhesive films
f Please see the chapter “WASHING” on
f If possible, wash the wheels every two weeks
Page 214. f Use only clean water and a little dishwashing
with a sponge or washing brush. If the wheels
detergent to clean light lenses, plastic head-
are exposed to road salt, grit or industrial dust,
Warning! light lenses, plastic parts, adhesive films and
weekly cleaning is necessary.
surfaces.
Danger of accident resulting in serious per- Do not clean when dry.
sonal injury or death if cleaning agents (e.g. Door, roof, lid and window seals Use a soft sponge or a soft, lint-free cloth. Gen-
wheel cleaning agents) come into contact tly wipe the surface without applying too much
with the brake discs. Caution! pressure.
The resulting film on the brake discs can im- The lubricant coating on the inner door seals, An interior window cleaner can also be used to
pair braking performance. convertible top and hardtop seals may be clean plastic surfaces (always read the cleaning
damaged by unsuitable cleaning and care agents. instructions on the container). We recommend
f Make sure that no cleaning agent comes into
contact with the brake discs. f Do not use any chemical cleaning agents Porsche interior window cleaner.
or solvents. f Gently wipe the surface without applying too
f If cleaning agent has come into contact with
the brake discs, thoroughly clean the brake f Do not use any preservative agents. much pressure.
discs with a strong jet of water. f Do not clean when dry.
f Wash dirt (e.g. abrasion, dust, road salt and
f Paying attention to any road users behind you, grit) from all seals regularly using warm f Never use other chemical cleaners or
dry the brake discs by applying the brakes at soapy water. solvents.
short intervals.
f If there is a risk of frost, protect the outer door f Rinse cleaned surfaces with clear water.

Metal particles (such as brass or copper in brake seals and lid seals against freezing into place
dust) must not remain too long on alloy wheels. with a suitable care product. Leather
Contact corrosion can cause pitting.
Characteristics and special features
Cleaners with an oxide-removing effect or the
The natural surface markings of leather, e.g.
wrong pH value, as are commonly used for other
creases, healed scars, insect sting marks, struc-
metals, as well as mechanical tools and products,
tural differences and slight variations in shade and
will damage the oxide layer and are therefore
grain add to the attractiveness of the natural leath-
unsuitable.
er product.
f Use only cleaners for alloy wheels (pH value
9.5). Products with the wrong pH value can

218 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Observe the following care instructions: Cleaning airbags covers f Secure the floor-mat to prevent it from sliding
into positions that could interfere with the safe
Caution! Danger! operation of your vehicle - do not install them
loosely in the vehicle.
The leather will be damaged by the use of There is a danger of serious personal injury Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you
unsuitable cleaning and care agents and by or death if the airbag system is impaired by nonskid floor-mats of the correct size.
incorrect treatment. improper cleaning work.
f Do not use caustic cleaners or hard f Do not make any modifications whatsoever on Cleaning fabric linings
cleaning aids. individual components such as the padded
covers of the steering wheel, passenger side f Fabric linings on pillars, convertible top liner
f Perforated leather must under no and sun blinds, etc. must be cleaned only
instrument panel, the front seats and the door
circumstances get wet on its reverse side. using suitable cleaning agents or a suitable dry
linings.
foam and a soft brush.
f Clean all types of leather regularly to remove f Let your authorized Porsche dealer clean
fine dust using a soft, damp, white woollen these components.
cloth or a commercially available Alcantara
microfibre cloth.
Carpets and floor-mats f Do not use a leather care product to clean
f Remove heavy contamination with a leather Alcantara.
cleaner. f Use only a vacuum cleaner or a medium stiff For regular care it is sufficient to clean the cover
Always read the instructions for use given on brush. with a soft brush.
the containers.
We recommend Porsche leather cleaner. f Remove stains and spots with Porsche stain Heavy abrasion or rubbing when cleaning causes
remover. a lasting change in the surface.
f Treat cleaned leather only with a leather
care product. To protect carpets, the Porsche range of accesso-
ries includes mats of the correct size and with the Cleaning when lightly soiled
We recommend the Porsche leather
care product. appropriate fastening. f Wet a soft cloth with water or a neutral soap
solution and wipe off the dirt.
Warning!
Cleaning when heavily soiled
Risk of an accident resulting in serious per-
sonal injury or death. f Wet a soft cloth with lukewarm water or
thinned white spirit and dab the dirt from the
f Always check the movement of the pedals be- outside in.
fore driving and make sure that they are not ob-
structed by a floor-mat or any other object.
Cleaning safety belts

Maintenance, Car Care 219

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f Use mild detergent to clean soiled belts. Storing your Porsche Electrical system
f When drying, avoid direct sunlight. f Remove the battery from the vehicle and store
If you intend to store your Porsche for a prolonged
it in a cool dry place, not on a cement floor.
f Only use suitable cleaning agents. period, please consult your authorized Porsche
When the battery is disconnected, the
dealer. The staff will be glad to advise you on the
f Do not tint or bleach the belts. alarm system is deactivated.
most suitable and necessary methods.
The belt fabric could be weakened, thus affec-
f Recharge the battery every 3 months. If the
ting safety. f Clean your vehicle thoroughly inside and out-
battery remains in the vehicle with the cables
side.
connected, it is necessary to check, remove
Clean the engine compartment.
and recharge the battery every 2-3 weeks.
The under carriage and chassis components
Do not fast charge the battery.
should be free of dirt and salt deposits.
f Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on
f Fill up the fuel tank.
Page 249.
f Change the oil and oil filter, and run the engine
for several minutes. Vehicle interior

f Increase the tire pressure to 50 psi (3.5 bar). The interior must be dry, especially in the area of
It is not recommended to lift the vehicle, due to the floor carpets. The use of drying agents (Silica-
the possibility of corrosion on shock absorber Gel) is recommended in vehicles with leather inte-
piston shafts. rior and in areas with high humidity. The recom-
The vehicle should be moved slightly, approxi- mended amount is 3 fabric bags of 1.1 lbs.
mately every four weeks, to prevent flat spot (500 grams) each placed on the floor carpets.
on the tires. Windows, doors and lids must be closed. The air
vents should be opened.
Climate control
The air conditioning system should be in good
working condition and fully charged.

Windshield/Headlight washer
f Check and correct antifreeze/cleaning solution
level as necessary.

220 Maintenance, Car Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Practical Tips, Emergency Service
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle ........................................ 222
Tires/Wheels ........................................... 223
Loading Information ................................... 234
Wheel Bolts ............................................. 236
Changing a wheel ...................................... 237
Flat Tire.................................................... 239
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting Platform
or Garage Lift ........................................... 242
Spacers ................................................... 243
Electrical System ..................................... 245
Battery .................................................... 249
Replacing the remote-control battery ......... 254
Emergency Starting with Jumper Cables ..... 255
Bulb chart ................................................. 257
Lights, Replacing Bulbs ............................. 257
Headlights ................................................ 258
Number Plate Light .................................... 266
Changing Light-Emitting Diodes and Long-Life
Bulbs ....................................................... 266
Adjusting Headlights .................................. 267
Towing ..................................................... 269

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 221

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Exercise Extreme Caution when f In particular, be very careful to ensure that f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.), the battery or fuel.
Working on your Vehicle jewelry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot get Keep a fire extinguisher in close reach.
caught in the engine-compartment blower, fan,
Danger! f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause
belts or other moving parts.
problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
Ignoring the following instructions may The radiator and radiator fans are in the front
about any servicing, have it done by your au-
cause serious personal injury or death. of the car.
thorized Porsche dealer.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted in
f The engine compartment of any motor vehicle the engine-compartment.
Improper maintenance during the warranty pe-
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not riod may affect your Porsche warranty cover-
The fans can start or continue running as a
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do age.
function of temperature, even with the engine
not attempt the adjustments described on the switched off. f Supplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid or
following pages. Carry out work in these areas only with the en- coolant, are hazardous to your health.
This caution also applies to the entire vehicle. gine off, the ignition switched off, and exercise Keep these fluids out of children’s reach and
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well extreme caution. dispose of them in accordance with the appro-
priate regulations.
ventilated area. f Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic ig-
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the nition system. When the ignition is on, high volt- f Some countries require additional tools and
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel age is present in all wires connected with the special spare parts to be carried.
fumes might be present. Be especially cau- ignition system; therefore, exercise extreme Please make enquiries before driving abroad.
tious of such devices such as hot water heat- caution when working on any part of the engine
ers which ignite a flame intermittently. while the ignition is on or the engine is running.

f Before working on any part in the engine com- f Always support your car with safety stands if it
partment, turn the engine off and let it cool is necessary to work under the car.
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment Jacks are not suitable for this kind of work.
components can burn skin on contact. f When working under the car without safety
f Be alert and cautious around engine at all stands but with the wheels on the ground,
times while the engine is running. make sure the car is on level ground, the
If work has to be performed with the engine wheels are blocked, and that the engine
running, always set the parking brake, and cannot be started.
make sure the shift lever is in neutral position Remove the ignition key.
or the PDK selector lever in position P or N.

222 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tires/Wheels Danger!
Risk of loss of control and serious personal
The original equipment tires and wheel rims on
injury or death.
your Porsche comply with all applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. f If while driving, your vehicle experiences a sud-
den vibration or ride disturbance, and/or you
For your safety remember the following: suspect that possible damage to your tires or
– Wheel rims and wheel bolts are matched to fit vehicle has occurred, you should immediately
your Porsche. reduce your speed without excessive use of
the brakes.
– If you intend to use other than original equip-
ment wheels, be sure that they conform to f Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and in-
Porsche specifications for your model. spect the tires.
Only tires with the same make and with the If you cannot determine the cause for the dis-
same specification code (e.g. “N0”, “N1”...) turbance, have your vehicle towed to the near-
can be mounted. est Porsche or tire dealer to have your vehicle
or tire(s) inspected.
– The use of wheel rims and wheel bolts that do
not meet specifications of the original factory f Continuing to operate the vehicle without cor-
installed equipment will affect the safe opera- rection could result in a loss of control and Example
tion of your vehicle. serious personal injury.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
– Before you plan on exchanging wheels, or
snow tires already mounted on the wheel rims, Quality grades can be found where applicable on
consult your authorized Porsche dealer. Your the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and max-
dealer has the technical information necessary imum section width.
to advise you which wheel rims and wheel bolts
are compatible with the original factory instal- All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
lations. Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specific govern-
ment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 223

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the government tire failure. f Cold tire inflation pressure means: all tires
course as a tire graded 100. The grade C corresponds to a level of perform- must be cold, ambient temperature maximum
The relative performance of tires depends upon ance which all passenger car tires must meet un- (68 °F/20 °C), when adjusting the inflation
the actual conditions of their use, however, and der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. pressure.
may depart significantly from the norm due to var- 109. Avoid sunlight striking the tires before measur-
iations in driving habits, service practices and dif- Grades B and A represent higher levels of per- ing cold pressures, since the pressures would
ferences in road characteristics and climate. formance on the laboratory test wheel than the rise from temperature influence.
minimum required by law.
Traction AA, A, B, C f Valve caps protect the valve from dust and dirt,
and thus from leakage.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are Warning! Always screw caps tightly down.
AA, A, B, and C and they represent the tire’s ability The temperature grade for this tire is established Replace missing caps immediately.
to stop on wet pavement as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified government test
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overload- f Use only plastic valve caps.
ed.
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive f Do not use commercially available sealant or
A tire marked C may have poor traction perform- loading, either separately or in combination, can tire inflating bottles. Only use Porsche
ance. cause heat buildup and possible tire failure, result- approved tire sealant.
ing in serious personal injury or death.
Warning! f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
COLD TIRES (68 °F/20 °C)” on Page 277.
The traction grade assigned to this is based on
braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and does
Tire pressures
not include cornering (turned) traction, accelera-
Warning!
tion, hydroplaning or peak traction characteris-
tics. Incorrect tire pressure causes increased tire
wear and adversely affects road handling.
Temperature A, B, C This could lead to tire failure, resulting in loss
of control, leading to serious personal injury
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and or death.
C, representing the tire’s resistance to the gener-
ation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when f Always use an accurate tire pressure gage
tested under controlled conditions on a specified when checking inflation pressures.
indoor laboratory test wheel. f Do not exceed the maximum tire pressure list-
Sustained high temperatures can cause the mate- ed on the tire sidewall.
rial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE PLA-
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden TE” on Page 275.

224 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should f Never let air out of hot tires.
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the This could cause the tire pressure to fall below
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle the prescribed value.
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
Insufficient tire filling pressure can cause tires to
tion pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
overheat and thus be damaged – even invisibly.
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
Hidden tire damage is not eliminated by subse-
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
quently correcting the tire pressure.
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.) Overloading
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring (TPM) Danger!
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
Risk of damage to vehicle parts, loss of con-
one or more of your tires is significantly under-in-
trol and serious personal injury or death.
flated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell-
tale illuminates, you should stop and check your f Do not overload your vehicle. Be careful about
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the the roof load.
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
f If loading the vehicle also correct the tire pres-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
sure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle can be Example of a tire pressure plate
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
found on the tire pressure plate and in the
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
chapter technical data. Tire pressure plate
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
f Never exceed the specified axle load.
Please note that the TPM is not a substitute for Information on the tire pressure plate
Overloading can shorten the service life of the
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s re-
tires and car, as well as lead to dangerous ve- A Seating capacity
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
hicle reactions and long braking distances. Maximum number of vehicle occupants, inclu-
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trig-
Damage due to overloading is not covered by ding the driver.
ger illumination of the TPM low tire pressure tell-
the vehicle warranty.
tale.
f On vehicles with tire pressure monitoring: f Please see the chapter “LOADING INFORMA-
Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE TION” on Page 234.
MONITORING” on Page 147.
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
When tires are warm, the tire pressure is COLD TIRES (68 °F/20 °C)” on Page 277.
increased.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 225

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 B Vehicle load limit Tire traction Tire wear
Is the maximum total weight limit specified of
the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehi- Warning! The original equipment tires on your Porsche have
cle. This is the maximum weight of passengers built-in tire wear indicators. They are molded into
and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. When driving on wet or slushy roads, a the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as
Please see the chapter “LOADING INFORMA- wedge of water may build up between the approximately 1/2 in. (12 mm) bands when the
TION” on Page 234. tires and the road. This phenomenon is tire tread depth is down to 1/16 of an in.
known as “hydroplane” and may cause par- (1.6 mm).
C Tire size for the front axle tial or complete loss of traction, vehicle
Check with your authorized Porsche dealer control or stopping ability. When the indicators appear in two or more adja-
about the current release status. cent grooves, it is time to replace the tires. We
f Reduce speed on wet surface to prevent this. recommend, however, that you do not let the tires
D Recommended tire pressure for the front axle
wear down to this extent.
These values are for cold tires (68 °F/20 °C).
Worn tires cannot grip the road surface properly
Tire life
E Tire size for the rear axle and are even less effective on wet roads.
Check with your authorized Porsche dealer Tire life depends on various factors, i. e., road Snow tires lose their traction capability when their
about the current release status. surfaces, traffic and weather conditions, driving tread depth falls below 5/32 in. (4 mm).
F Recommended tire pressure for the rear axle. habits, type of tires and tire care.
In the United States, state laws may govern the
These values are for cold tires (68 °F/20 °C). f Inspect your tires for wear and damage before minimum tread depth permissible. Follow all such
G In vehicles with collapsible spare wheel: driving off. If you notice uneven or substantial laws.
Size and tire pressure of the spare wheel. wear, wheels might need alignment or tires
should be balanced or replaced.

226 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Danger! Tire care Tire damage, puncture
Driving on worn tires can result in loss of con-
f Avoid damaging tires and wheel rims. High-pressure cleaning units can damage the
trol of the vehicle and could cause serious
tires.
personal injuries or death. f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle. f Please see the chapter “HIGH-PRESSURE
f Do not drive with worn tires or tires showing
CLEANING UNITS, STEAM CLEANERS” on
cuts or bruises as they may lead to sudden f Check tires for uneven wear and damage
Page 213.
deflation and loss of control which could cause before driving off.
severe personal injury. f Check tires for imbedded material, cuts, punc-
f Remove imbedded material.
tures, cracks and bulges (side wall) before driv-
f Specialized high performance tires on high
f Replace worn or damaged tires immediately. ing off.
performance sports cars exhibit more wear
than those on a family sedan, or even a high f Keep oil, fuel, brake fluid, etc. away from tires. In case of tire damage, where it is uncertain wheth-
performance sedan. er there is a break in the ply with all its conse-
f Replace missing valve stem caps.
Therefore, it is important to check your tire quences or tire damage caused by thermal or me-
pressure and condition at least every two f Keep tires inflated correctly. chanical overloading due to loss of pressure or
weeks. any other prior damage, we recommend that the
f Wash tires when washing the vehicle. Also
tire be replaced for safety reasons.
clean inner side of wheels.
If you notice that tires are wearing unevenly, con-
If one faulty tire is replaced it should be noted that
sult your Porsche dealer. f Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the difference in tread depth on one axle must not
Uneven wear may not always be due to improper the wheels.
exceed 30%.
wheel alignment. It can be the result of individual
f Check wheel rims for corrosion. Handling inconsistencies may result.
driving habits such as cornering at high speeds. If
the tire pressure is not checked and adjusted f Remove road salt, if driving in winter. f Perform a visual inspection if necessary.
regularly, abnormal tire wear can also occur.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 227

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Danger! Tire replacements If new tires are installed only on one axle, a notice-
able change in handling occurs due to the different
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
If in doubt, contact your Porsche dealer. tread depth of the other tires.
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure
Use only tire makes and types approved by This happens especially if only rear tires are re-
increases risk of a tire failure and resulting
Porsche. placed. However, this condition disappears as the
loss of control. Furthermore, low tire pres-
new tires are broken in.
sure increases rate of wear of the affected If you do not use a Porsche recommended
tires. replacement tire, make sure that you f Please adjust your driving style accordingly.
f Check tires – including sidewalls – regularly for purchase your new tires from a reputable tire Installation of new tires should only be done by a
foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks and bulges. dealer and that the dealer complies with all qualified tire technician.
manufacturers warnings for those tires.
f After driving off road, examine tires for signs Valves
of damage such as cuts, tears, bulges or for- Only tires with the same make and with the
eign objects stuck in the tread. Replace a dam- same specification code (e.g. “N0”, “N1”...) Rubber valve stems must be replaced every time
aged tire if necessary. can be mounted. a tire is replaced.
For metal valves, the installation and replacement
f Cross curb edges slowly and at right angles if instructions must be observed.
Before mounting new tires, check with your
possible.
Avoid driving over steep or sharp curbs.
Porsche dealer about the current release f Use only genuine Porsche metal valves.
status.
f In cases of doubt, have the wheel (particularly f Protect the valve inserts against soiling with
Use tires with “ZR” quality standards. There valve caps.
the inner side) checked by an authorized
are currently no standards concerning tire Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss
Porsche dealer.
strength at speeds above 150 mph (240 km/h). of air.
Tires should be replaced no less than on one axle f Use only plastic valve caps.
at the time.
Only tires of the same make and type must be
used. Mixed tires are not permissible.
Initially, new tires do not have their full traction.
You should therefore drive at moderate speeds
during the first 60 - 120 miles (100 - 200 km).

228 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Parking at the curb Wheel alignment, wheel balancing Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) sensors
Warning! As a precaution, have wheels with summer tires
balanced in the spring, and those with mud and Before changing wheels, make sure that the
Hard impacts against curbs (or traffic snow tires before winter. wheels are compatible with your vehicle's TPM.
islands) are dangerous and may cause hid- Unbalanced wheels may affect car handling and
den tire damage which is not noticeable until f Check this with your authorized Porsche
tire life.
later. Such damage can result in accidents at dealer.
Only the specified weights may be used for wheel
high speeds causing serious personal injury balancing.
or death. Self-adhesive weights must not come into contact Removing and storing tires
Depending on the force of impact, the edge with cleaning agents, since they could drop off.
of the rim can also be damaged. Uneven tread wear indicates wheel imbalance. In f After changing, adjust tire pressure and torque
wheel bolts diagonally to 94 ftlb (130 Nm).
f If you are in doubt, have the wheel checked by this event, the vehicle should be checked at an au-
an expert, particularly if you suspect damage thorized Porsche dealer. Tires must always remain on the same side of
on the inside. the vehicle.
Warning! When wheels are removed, the direction of
f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
rotation and position of each wheel should be
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle. Exercise If, during a trip, uneven running or vibrations
marked.
care when parking along curbs. occur that could be caused by damage to
tires or the car, the speed must be reduced Example
immediately, but without braking sharply.
If you continue your trip without having the FR (front right), FL, RR and RL.
cause of the fault remedied, you might lose Wheels must always be fitted in accordance with
control of your vehicle which could cause se- their marking.
rious personal injury or death.
The perception that tire durability and perform-
f Stop the vehicle and check the tires. ance are immune to the effects of storage and
f If no cause for the fault can be found, drive age is unfounded.
carefully to the nearest authorized Porsche Chemical additives, which make the rubber elas-
dealer. tic, lose their effectiveness in the course of time
and the rubber becomes brittle and cracks.
Therefore, the tires should be inspected from
time to time.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 229

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Note Before mounting snow tires, consult with Danger!
your Porsche dealer. He has the technical
Under no circumstances should tires older than 6 Risk of accident and serious personal injury
information necessary to advise you on
years be used on your Porsche. or death due to excessive speed.
wheel and tire compatibility.
The age of the tire can be obtained from the “DOT” f Always check the maximum speed rating on
Snow tires should have the same load capacity as
code number. If, for example, the last four num- the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle.
original equipment tires and should be mounted on
bers read 1208, then the tire was produced in the
all four wheels. f Never exceed the maximum speed rating of
12th week of 2008.
Snow tires with studs should be run at moderate the tires.
f Store tires in a cool and dry place. speeds when new in order to give the studs time
to settle. f Fit winter tires to both axles well before the
Snow tires cold season begins.
Danger! Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased
For a better grip on snow and ice, use radial M+S to advise you.
Tires with badly worn treads and studs are
tires with studs.
very dangerous and could cause accidents Maintenance note
Check with your local Motor Vehicle Bureau for
resulting in serious personal injuries or
possible restrictions. We recommend fitting snow tires on the vehicle at
death.
temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) since the driving
Danger! f Make sure they are replaced immediately. performance of summer tires is reduced at low
temperatures. Summer tires may be permanently
Risk of loss of control and damage to the f Do not drive a vehicle equipped with snow tires damaged at extremely low temperatures.
vehicle as well as serious personal injury or at prolonged high speed.
death. Snow tires do not have the same degree of Winter tires lose their traction capability when their
The standard tires profile and rubber mixture traction on dry, wet or snowfree roads as a tread depth falls below 5/32 in. (4 mm).
are optimized for wet and dry driving condi- normal tire.
tions, and may not prove favorable for snow Furthermore, snow tires wear rapidly under
conditions. these conditions.
f Therefore install M+S tires before driving in
such conditions. Comply with all state and local laws
governing snow tire and tread depth
requirements.

230 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Snow chains Fitting snow chains
The use of snow chains is not permitted when
Caution! 5 mm spacers are mounted.
Risk of damage to body, axle or brake com-
ponents. Caution!
f Fit snow chains only to the rear wheels, and Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the
only with the tire/rim combination listed in the 5 mm spacers are not removed before fitting
Technical Data. snow chains.
To ensure adequate clearance between chain
f To permit the fitting of snow chains, have the
and body, Porsche recommends only the use
5 mm spacers removed on all 4 wheels.
of fine-link chains such as those approved by
Porsche.
f To fit/remove the spacers:
f Follow instructions issued by the supplier of Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
the chains.
f Please see the chapter “SPACERS” on
Page 243.
Different states and countries have varying statu-
tory requirements regarding maximum speed.
Check with local authorities for possible restric- Tire designations
tions.
Due to new speed and load ratings for radial tires,
f Remove chains as soon as the roads are free new designations have come into force for snow
of ice and snow. tires for your Porsche.
The designation to be used for ZR tires is e.g.,
265/40 ZR 18 (Z = code letter for radial tires for
speeds above 150 mph / 240 km/h).

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 231

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 B TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Example: DOT xx xx xxxx xxxx
– DOT
The DOT symbol indicates that the tires com-
ply with the requirements of the US Depart-
ment of Transportation and provides informa-
tion about:
– first two-digit code means manufacturer’s iden-
tification mark.
– second two-digit code means tire size.
– third four-digit code means tire type code.
– fourth four-digit code means date of manufac-
ture.
If, for example, the last four numbers read
0208, the tire was produced in the 2nd week
Example of Inscription
– ZR - code letter for radial tires for speeds of 2008.
above 150 mph / 240 km/h C Tire ply composition and material
Inscription on radial tire There are currently no standards concerning
tire strength at speeds above 150 mph The number of layers in the tread and sidewalls
A Tire size
(240 km/h). and their material composition.
Example: P 295/30 ZR 19 100 Y
– R - Belt type code letter for radial D Maximum permissible inflation pressure
– P - The tire is designed for Passenger vehicle.
– 19 - Indication of rim diameter in inches The maximum permissible cold inflation pressure
This information is not included on all tires.
to which a tire can be inflated.
– 295 - Indication of tire width in mm – 100 - Load capacity coefficient
f Do not exceed the permissible inflation
– 30 - Indication of tire height to tire width ratio – Y - Speed code letter pressure.
in percent – XL (Extra Load) - Tire with increased load rat-
ing

232 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 E Maximum Load rating Tip on driving
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds can Tires with a maximum speed rating that is lower
be carried by the tire. If you replace tires always than the specified maximum vehicle speed may be
use a tire that has the same maximum load rating mounted only if they bear an M+S identification on
as the factory installed tire. the tire sidewall.
F Radial f Please note that in addition to the winter tires,
all-season and all-terrain tires are also subject
The identification indicates if the tire has radial
to speed limits and bear this identification.
structure.
G Term of tubeless or tube tire Inscription on light alloy wheels
Identification for tubeless tires.
Maintenance note

Speed code letter f Protect the valve inserts against soiling with
valve caps.
The speed code letter indicates the maximum per- Use only plastic valve caps.
missible speed for the tire. Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss
This code letter is shown on the tire sidewall. of air.
A- Rim width in inches
B- Rim-flange contour code letter
Note on operation C- Symbol for drop-center rim
T = up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
f The rim width in inches A and the rim offset F D- Rim diameter in inches
H = up to 131 mph (210 km/h) E- Double hump
are visible from the outside. F- Rim offset in mm
V = up to 150 mph (240 km/h) The information is inscribed on the back of the
W = up to 167 mph (270 km/h) spokes near the tire valve.
Y = up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
(Y) = up to 186 mph (300 km/h) as for
Y tires. Speeds of more than
300 km/h (186 mph) are also
possible at a maximum tire load
capacity of 85 % (confirmation from
tire manufacturer required for
speeds of more than 186 mph (300
km/h)).

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 233

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Loading Information The Gross Combined Weight Rating is the Danger!
maximum total weight rating of vehicle, passen-
Risk of loss of control, damage to the vehicle
gers and cargo.
Definitions and serious personal injury or death.
The Vehicle Capacity Weight - Load Limit - is
f Never exceed the specified axle loads.
The Curb weight - actual weight of your vehicle - the maximum total weight limit specified of the
Overloading can shorten the service life of the
vehicle weight including standard and optional load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This
tires and car, as well as lead to dangerous
equipment, fluids and emergency tools. This is the maximum weight of passengers and cargo
vehicle reactions and long braking distances.
weight does not include passengers and cargo. that can be loaded into the vehicle. This informa-
Damage due to overloading is not covered by
tion can be found on the tire pressure plate.
The Gross Vehicle Weight is sum of the curb the vehicle warranty.
weight and the weight of passengers and cargo The maximum loaded vehicle weight is the
combined. sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle ca-
pacity weight and production options weight.
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maxi-
mum total weight of vehicle, passengers, luggage The load rating is the maximum load that a tire
and optional equipment. is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum The maximum load rating is the load rating for
load limit for the front or the rear axle. This infor- a tire at the maximum permissble inflation pres-
mation is located on the safety compliance sticker sure.
located in the driver’s side door jamb.
The cargo capacity is the permissible weight of
For determining the compatibility of the tire and cargo, the substracted weight of passengers from
vehicle load capabilities: the load limit.
f Please see the chapter “TECHNICAL DATA” on f Never exceed the permissible limits.
Page 276.
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “100”) is a min-
imum requirement.

234 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Determining the combined weight of 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
occupants and cargo: passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds.
f Add the weight of all occupants and then add
the total luggage weight (figure). 4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
Steps for determining correct load limit For example, if the ”XXX“ amount equals
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of 400 lbs. and there will be two - 150 lb passen-
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX gers in your vehicle, the amount of available
pounds" on your vehicle’s placard (depending cargo and luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
on the date of manufacture). (400 - 300 (2 x 150) = 100 lbs.).

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and passengers that will be riding in your vehi- and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
cle. weight may not safely exceed the available car-
go and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.

Example for determining the combined weight of

occupants and cargo

Vehicle Load Capacity

f The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed the weight shown on the
tire plate in the vehicle.
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE PLA-
TE” on Page 275.
f Never exceed the number of passengers
shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 235

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 f Always clean the wheel bolts before fitting. Wheel Securing Bolts
f Apply a thin coat of Optimoly TA (aluminum
If the wheels have to be removed at the workshop,
paste) on the thread and between the bolt head
please do not forget to hand over the wrench
and movable spherical cap ring (arrows).
socket for the wheel securing bolts along with the
The bearing surface of the spherical cap
car key.
facing the wheel must not be greased.
The wrench socket for the wheel securing bolts is
f Replace damaged wheel bolts.
in the tool box.
Only use the Original Porsche wheel bolts spe-
cially designed for this vehicle type. To loosen or tighten the wheel bolt with anti-theft
protection, a wrench socket with the appropriate
Tightening torque coding must be used between the wheel bolt and
the wheel-bolt spanner.
Tightening torque of wheel bolts: f When positioning the wrench socket, ensure
96 ftlb./130 Nm that it engages fully in the teeth of the wheel
bolt.

Wheel Bolts
Danger!
Risk of wheel bolt breakage and wheel sepa-
ration, resulting in serious personal injury or
death.
f Follow all instructions concerning wheel bolts.

236 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Changing a wheel 4. Slightly slacken the wheel bolts of the wheel to
be changed.
Warning! 5. Lift the car only at the specified jacking points.
Risk of serious personal injury or death. The 6. Raise the car until the wheel lifts off the
car may slip off the jack. ground.
f Make sure that no one is in the vehicle when Please see the chapter “LIFTING THE VEHICLE
jacking up and changing a wheel. WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM OR GARAGE LIFT”
on Page 242.
f Always place the car on stable supports if work
has to be carried out under the car. 7. Remove 1 or 2 wheel bolts (see respective
illustration).
Risk of damage to the brake discs of the
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB). 8. Screw in assembly aids instead of the wheel
bolts.
f Always screw in both assembly aids when
changing a wheel.

Note
Screw in assembly aid for cars without Porsche
The tools required for changing a wheel (e.g. jack, Ceramic Composite Brake
wheel bolt wrench, assembly aids) are not sup-
plied with the car. 9. Remove the remaining wheel bolts.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
advise you. Note on operation
1. Apply the handbrake fully and engage 1st gear f To remove or mount the spacers:
or PDK selector-lever position P and remove Please see the chapter “SPACERS” on
the ignition key. Page 243.

2. Switch on the hazard warning lights if neces-

sary.
3. Secure the car against rolling away, e.g. by
means of wedges under the wheels on the op-
posite side.
This is particularly important on slopes.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 237

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR Checking tire pressure with a
COLD TIRES (68 °F/20 °C)” on Page 277.
pressure gage
14.Lower the car fully and remove the jack.
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
15.Tighten wheel bolts in diagonally opposite
sequence. 2. Press the pressure gage onto the valve stem.

f Immediately after changing a wheel, use Note on operation

a torque wrench to check the prescribed
f Do not press too hard or force the valve stem
tightening torque (96 ftlb./130 Nm).
sideways, or air will escape.
Note on operation for vehicles with Tire Pressure If the sound of air escaping from the tire is
Monitoring heard, reposition the pressure gage.

f On vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring, the 3. Read the tire pressure on the gage stem and
settings on the on-board computer must be compare it to the permissble tire pressure.
updated after the wheel change. This information can be found on the tire pres-
sure plate or in the chapter Technical Data.
f Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
MONITORING” on Page 147. COLD TIRES (68 °F/20 °C)” on Page 277.
Screw in two assembly aids for cars with Porsche
Ceramic Composite Brake 4. Remove the pressure gage.

10.Take the wheel off and put a new wheel on. f Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING” on Page 147.
Please see the chapter “WHEEL BOLTS” on
Page 236.
11.Insert wheel bolts and tighten by hand.
12.Remove assembly aids, screw in remaining
wheel bolts.
Initially tighten bolts only slightly in diagonally
opposite sequence so that the wheel
is centred.
13.Inflate the tire if necessary.

238 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Flat Tire Important note

Sealing the tire with the tire repair kit is only

Warning!
an emergency repair. Even with the tire air-
Failure to follow these instructions may result tight, it may be used only for short journeys
in serious personal injury to you or to by- in an emergency.
standers. The maximum permitted speed is 50 mph
(80 km/h).
f If you have a flat tire, move a safe distance off
the road. Turn the emergency flasher on and f Do not use commercially available sealant or
use other warning devices to alert other motor- tire inflating bottles.
ists. Set the parking brake. Use only the tire sealant located in the luggage
compartment.
f Do not park your vehicle where it may contact
dry grass, brush or other flammable materials.
Warning!
The hot parts of the exhaust system could set
such materials on fire, thereby causing both Risk of accident, resulting in serious
property damage and serious personal injury personal injury or death.
or death.
f Have tires replaced by a specialist workshop
as soon as possible.
A tire sealant and compressor with pressure
tester are located in the luggage compartment. f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
speeds.
f Please observe the safety and operating in-
structions on the special sealant bottle with a
special Porsche part number and on the com-
pressor – these are essential.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 239

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 The tire sealant and a compressor with pressure Warning!
tester can be found in the luggage compartment.
The sealant is highly flammable and harmful
The tire sealant comprises: to health.
– A filler bottle f Fire, naked flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling tire sealant.
– A sticker denoting the maximum permissible
speed for the driver’s field of vision f Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing due to
caustic chemical properties of the tire sealant.
– A filler hose
f Keep tire sealant away from children.
– A valve turner and
f Do not inhale vapors, due to consequent harm
– A spare valve insert.
to personal health resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
Danger!
Risk of accident, resulting in serious per- In case of contact with the sealant:
sonal injury or death.
f If sealant gets on the skin or in the eyes,
f Use the tire sealant only in the case of cuts or thoroughly rinse the affected part of the body
A - Filler bottle punctures no larger than 0.15 in. (4 mm). off immediately.
B - Filler hose
f Never use the tire sealant if the rim is dam- f Change soiled clothing immediately.
aged.
Tire sealant f Get medical attention immediately in the event
of an allergic reaction.
The tire sealant can be used to seal small cuts,
especially in the tire tread. f If sealant was swallowed, thoroughly rinse out
the mouth without delay and drink plenty of
Sealing the tire with the tire sealant is only an water.
emergency repair, so you can drive to the next Do not induce vomiting.
workshop. Even with the tire air-tight, it may be Get medical attention immediately.
used only for short journeys in an emergency.

240 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 5.Screw filler hose B onto the filler bottle. 16.Please consult your authorized Porsche
The filler bottle is now open. dealer.
6.Unscrew valve cap from tire valve F. Note on operation for vehicles with Tire Pressure
7.Remove valve insert E from the tire valve with Monitoring
valve turner D. f On vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring, the
Keep the valve insert in a clean and dry place. settings on the on-board computer must be
8.Remove plug C of the filler hose B. updated after the wheel change.
Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE
9.Push filler hose onto the tire valve. MONITORING” on Page 147.
10.Hold filler bottle higher than the level of the tire
valve and press it together forcefully until the Care Instructions
bottle is completely emptied into the tire. After drying, any sealant that emerges can be
11.Pull filler hose off the tire valve. peeled off like a film.

12.Twist the valve insert firmly into the tire valve Warning!
using the valve turner.
Risk of accident, resulting in serious per-
A- Filler bottle 13.Connect the compressor to the cigarette light- sonal injury or death.
B- Filler hose er and inflate the tire to the prescribed tire
C- Plug of the filler hose pressure. f Have the tire replaced by an authorized
D- Valve turner Porsche dealer immediately.
E- Valve insert
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
F- Tire valve COLD TIRES (68 °F/20 °C)” on Page 277. f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
14.Screw valve cap onto the tire valve. speeds.
Inserting sealant
15.Check the tire pressure after driving for around f Do not exceed maximum speed of 50 mph
1.Leave the object that caused the puncture in (80 km/h).
10 minutes.
the tire.
If the tire pressure is less than 22 psi (1.5 bar), f Please always observe the safety and opera-
2.Remove sealant and the enclosed sticker from do not continue driving. ting instructions, which can be found in the
the luggage compartment. If a value of more than 22 psi (1.5 bar) is indi- separate operating instructions for the sealant
cated, correct the pressure to the prescribed and on the compressor.
3.Adhere the sticker in the driver's field of vision.
value.
4.Shake filler bottle A.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 241

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Platform lift
Before the car is driven on to a lifting platform, it
must be ensured that there is enough space be-
tween the lifting platform and the vehicle.

Garage lift
A garage lift must be used only at the illustrated
jacking points.

Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting Caution!

Platform or Garage Lift Serious personal injury or death and/or seri-
The car must be raised only at the illustrated jack- ous damage to the engine or the vehicle may
ing points. occur, if you lift the vehicle improperly.
f Never lift the vehicle at any other place than
the jacking points.
f Never lift the vehicle by the engine, transmis-
sion or axles.
f Do not damage any sensitive components in
the vicinity of the jacking points.

242 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Spacers Note on operation
f To fit/remove the spacers:
f Use the spacers only together with wheels and
Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
fastening parts approved by Porsche.
Before having spacers fitted, find out about the f Please see the chapter “CHANGING A WHEEL”
current approval status. on Page 237.

Mounting an emergency spare wheel

If 5 mm spacers are mounted, these must not be
removed to mount an emergency spare wheel.

Fitting snow chains

The use of snow chains is not permitted when
5 mm spacers are mounted.

Caution!
Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the
5 mm spacers are not removed before fitting Removing the spacers
snow chains. 1. Unscrew both countersunk screws (M6x16) on
f To permit the fitting of snow chains, have the the wheel hub.
5 mm spacers removed on all 4 wheels. 2. Remove the spacer.
3. Fasten the brake disc with the short M6x12
countersunk screws, part No.:
900.269.047.09.
Tightening torque 7.5 ftlb. (10 Nm).
4. For wheel mounting without a spacer, 5 mm
shorter wheel bolts (part No.:
997.361.203.01) must be used.
Tightening torque: 96 ftlb. (130 Nm).

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 243

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Mounting the spacers
1. Remove wheel.
2. Unscrew both countersunk screws (M6x12) on
the break disc.
3. Fasten the spacer with the long M6x16
countersunk screws.
Tightening torque 7.5 ftlb. (10 Nm).
4. Fit wheel. To do this use the longer wheel
bolts for fastening the wheels.
Tightening torque: 96 ftlb. (130 Nm).
f Please see the chapter “CHANGING A WHEEL”
on Page 237.

Required scope of parts if the spacers are

removed
Short countersunk screws (M6x12) Long wheel bolt
Part No: 900.269.047.09 - X: Bolt length approx. 49 mm
- Arrows: spherical cap ring
1 set short wheel bolts
Part No: 997.361.203.01 Wheel bolt identifying features
Short anti-theft protection For identification purposes, the movable spherical
Part No: 996.361.057.01 cap ring is galvanised in red on the long wheel
f For information on the spacers: Please see the bolts.
chapter “SPACERS” on Page 243. The long wheel bolts must only be used together
with 5 mm spacers fitted.
The short wheel bolts are not marked in colour.
The short wheel bolts must only be used without
5 mm spacers fitted.
f Tightening torque for both wheel bolts:
96 ftlb. (130 Nm).

244 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical System
In order to avoid damage and faults in electrical or
electronic systems, electrical accessories should
be installed at your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Only use accessories authorized by Porsche.

Warning!
Risk of short circuit and fire, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
Replacing fuses or relays with the engine
running or the ignition on could cause elec-
trical shock.
f Disconnect the negative terminal on the
battery during all work on the electrical
system.
Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on In the passenger’s footwell
In storage tray between the front seats
Page 249. (not on vehicles with iPod, USB, AUX interfaces)
Note on operation

Sockets The sockets and thus the connected electrical

Relays accessories function even if the ignition is
Defective relays should be changed only by an Electrical accessories should preferably be switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn.
authorized workshop. connected to the 12 V sockets.
If the engine is not running and the accessories
f Please observe the maximum power are switched on, the vehicle battery will be dis-
consumption. charged.
Do not operate additional accessories for more
Note on operation than 5 minutes when engine is off. Continuing to
The tire filling compressor must be connected to do so may drain the battery such that it may go
the cigarette lighter. completely dead.
Maximum power consumption for both sock-
ets together: 70 W.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 245

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Alarm system, central locking Load switch-off after 2 hours or 7 days
The status of the central locking and alarm system If the ignition key is removed, loads which are
is not changed by disconnecting the battery. switched on or are in standby mode (such as the
When the battery is disconnected, the alarm luggage compartment light and interior light) are
system ceases to function. automatically switched off after approx. 2 hours.
The Radio/PCM is automatically switched off after
Central locking overload protection approx. 10 minutes.
If the vehicle is not started or unlocked with the
If the central locking system is operated more remote control within 7 days, the remote control
than ten times within a minute, further operation is standby function is switched off (to save the
blocked for 30 seconds. vehicle battery).
1. In this case, unlock the driver’s door with the
key at the door lock.
Leave the door closed in order to prevent the
alarm system from being triggered.
2. Press button 1 on the remote control.
The remote control is now activated again.

246 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Replace only with fuses of the same rating.
We recommend using genuine Porsche fuses
for replacement.

Note
f If a fuse blows repeatedly consult an author-
ized Porsche dealer.
f Never try to “repair” fuses: you may cause se-
rious damage to other parts of the electrical
system.

Replacing fuses A - Plastic gripper

B - Spare fuses
In order to prevent damage to the electrical sys-
tem due to short circuits and overloads, the indi- 1. Switch off the load with the defective fuse.
vidual circuits are protected by fuses. 2. Pull off plastic cover at the finger hole (arrow).
The fuse box is located in the driver’s footwell. The fuse plan and instructions for
emergency unlocking of the luggage
compartment lid can be found on the inner
side of the cover.
3. Remove the corresponding fuse from its slot
using the plastic gripper A in order to check it.
A blown fuse can be identified by the melted
metal strip.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 247

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emergency unlocking of the front luggage
compartment lid
If the battery is discharged, the front luggage
compartment lid can be opened only with the aid
of a donor battery.

Note
The engine cannot be started with this method.
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY
STARTING WITH JUMPER CABLES” on
Page 255.

Unlocking lid
1. Use the key to unlock the vehicle at the door
lock.
2. Remove the plastic cover from the fuse box.
A - Plastic gripper (yellow) 5. Use the black jumper cable to connect the
3. Pull out positive terminal C (red) in the fuse box C - Positive terminal (red) negative terminal of the donor battery to the
using the plastic gripper A (yellow). door arrester D.
4. Use a jumper cable to connect the positive
terminal of the donor battery to the positive 6. Press button 2 on the remote control for
terminal C in the fuse box. approx. 2 seconds to unlock the luggage
compartment lid.
Note The alarm system is switched off.
If the vehicle was locked, the alarm horn will sound 7. Disconnect the negative cable first, then the
when the negative cable is connected. positive cable.
8. Push positive terminal C into the fuse box and
push on the plastic fuse box cover.

248 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Battery f Wear eye protection. Charge state
f Do not allow battery acid to come in contact
The battery is located in the front luggage A well-charged battery prevents starting problems
with your skin, eyes, fabric or painted
compartment under a black plastic cover. and has a longer service life.
surfaces.
Traffic density, requirements regarding noise, ex-
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY OPERA-
f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your haust gas and fuel consumption reduce the engine
TION – PULLING OUT THE IGNITION KEY” on
eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with speed and, hence, the alternator output.
Page 74.
cold water for several minutes and call a doc- However, the large number of electrical loads has
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY UNLO- tor. markedly increased the demand for electrical po-
CKING OF THE FRONT LUGGAGE COMPART- wer.
f Spilled electrolyte must be rinsed off at once
MENT LID” on Page 248.
with a solution of baking soda and water to In order to avoid discharging the battery
neutralize the acid. unintentionally:
Warning!
Risk of short circuit, fire and damage to alternera-
Battery posts, terminals and related acces- f Switch off unnecessary electrical loads in city
sories contain lead and lead compounds, traffic, on short trips or in a line or traffic.
tor and electronic control units, resulting in seri-
chemicals known to the State of California to
ous personal injury or death.
cause cancer and reproductive harm. f Always remove the ignition key from the igni-
f Observe all warning notes on the battery. tion switch when leaving the car.
f Always protect your skin by washing thorough-
f Disconnect the negative terminal on the bat- ly with soap and water. f Avoid frequent operation of the convertible top
tery during all work on the electrical system. and operation of the Porsche Communication
Risk of explosion as a result of static charge, Management system and audio system when
f Do not lay tools or other metal objects on the resulting in serious personal injury or death. the engine is not running.
f Do not wipe the battery with a dry cloth.
battery as they could cause a short circuit
across the battery terminal. f In the cold season in particular or if the vehicle
f Eliminate potential electrostatic charge by is used primarily for short journeys, it may be
Hydrogen gas generated by the battery necessary to recharge the battery from time to
touching the vehicle before touching the bat-
could cause an explosion, resulting in time.
tery.
serious personal injury or death.
f Do not expose the battery to an open flame,
electrical spark or a lit cigarette.
f Do not wipe battery with a dry cloth.
Risk of serious personal injury or death and
damage to the fabric, metal or paint.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 249

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Battery care Battery charging Slow battery charging
Automotive batteries lose their efficiency when Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
f Ensure that battery is securely mounted.
not in use. advise you about a suitable charger.
f Keep terminals and connections clean and The charge available in your battery can be meas-
1. Always observe the instructions of the charger
properly tightened. ured with a battery hydrometer.
manufacturer.
Corrosion can be prevented by coating the ter- We recommend that the battery voltage be tested
Depending on the type of charger, the battery
minals and connections with petroleum jelly or by your authorized Porsche dealer who has the ap-
may have to be disconnected.
silicone spray. propriate equipment.
In this case, always disconnect the negative
f Ensure that vent caps are securely tightened to If the car is not driven for prolonged periods, the lead first, and then the positive lead – risk of
prevent spillage. battery must be charged at least every 6 weeks. short circuit!
A discharged battery allows rapid formation of sul-
Checking the electrolyte fluid level fates, leading to premature deterioration of the Reconnect the leads in reverse order.
The acid level should be checked more frequently plates.
2. Before charging, cold batteries must be
by a qualified specialist workshop during the sum- warmed up indoors.
mer months and in predominantly warm countries. Warning!
3. Frozen batteries must be thawed out first
Hydrogen gas generated by the battery before being charged.
could cause an explosion, resulting in
serious personal injury or death. 4. When charging, ensure that there is adequate
ventilation.
f Charge battery in a well ventilated area.
5. Connect the charger to the battery.
f Never charge a frozen battery. It may explode Only plug into the mains and switch the
because of gas trapped in the ice. Allow a fro- charger on when it is connected up correctly.
zen battery to thaw out first.
6. Switch on the charger.
f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your
eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with 7. After charging, switch off the charger first and
cold water for several minutes and call a doc- then disconnect it.
tor. f Please see the chapter “PUTTING VEHICLE
INTO OPERATION” on Page 251.

250 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Winter operation Replacing battery Putting vehicle into operation
The capacity and ability of the battery to store The service life of the battery is subject to normal After the battery is connected or after an exhaus-
power decreases at low outside temperatures. wear; it depends greatly on care, climatic conditi- tively discharged battery is charged, the multi-
Moreover, the battery is more heavily loaded in ons, and driving conditions (distances, loads). functional PSM light lights up on the instrument
winter months, e.g. by the heated rear window, panel and a message appears on the on-board
f Only use an original Porsche battery, with the
more frequent use of additional lights, the fans computer to indicate a fault.
correct part number, as a replacement.
and the windshield wipers, etc.
This fault can be remedied with a few simple
f Please observe the disposal instructions for
f Have the battery checked before the start steps:
batteries.
of winter.
1. Start the engine.
Maintenance note 2. With the vehicle stationary, perform a few
Keep the battery well charged to prevent it steering movements to the left and right and
from freezing. then drive a short distance in a straight line
until the multifunctinal PSM light goes out and
A discharged battery can freeze at 23 °F (--5 °C), the message on the on-board computer
but a fully charged battery only freezes at -- 40 °F disappears.
(--40 °C).
3. If the warnings do not disappear, then:
A frozen battery must always be thawed before Drive carefully to the nearest authorized
connecting jump leads. Porsche dealer.
Have the fault remedied.
4. After the warnings disappear:
Stop the vehicle in a suitable place.
f Perform adaptation of the power windows:
Please see the chapter “STORING END
POSITION OF THE WINDOWS” on Page 28.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 251

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Removing the battery
The required tool is in the tool kit.
The battery is located in the front luggage com-
partment under a black plastic lid.

Warning!
Risk of damage to alternator and electronic
control units.
f Do not disconnect the battery while the engine
is running.
This also applies to cars equipped with a bat-
tery main switch.
f Never drive the car with a disconnected bat-
tery.
Risk of caustic burns from escaping acid.
1. Switch off engine and all electrical loads. 4. Important: disconnect the negative (–) ground
f Keep vent caps on to avoid spillage. wire first, and then the positive (+) cable -
2. Open turn-locks A.
danger of short circuit!
f Do not tilt the battery when removing and in- Remove plastic lid.
stalling it. 5. Unscrew fastening screw B.
3. Pull off central vent hose C.
6. Remove battery.
Danger!
Risk of short circuit and explosion, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
f Important: disconnect the negative (–) ground
wire first, and then the positive (+) cable.

252 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installing the battery
1. Put battery in and push it all the way to the
stop.
2. Screw in fastening screw B.

Danger!
Risk of short circuit and explosion, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
f Important: connect the positive (+) cable first,
and then the negative (–) ground wire.

3. Important: connect the positive (+) cable first,

and then the negative (–) ground wire -
danger of short circuit!
4. Push on central vent hose C.
Fitting the plastic lid 4. Turn the turn-locks so that they point in
longitudinal direction.
1. Insert the two outer hooks of the plastic lid into
the eye mounts of the lid opening. 5. Press the turn-locks down until they audibly
engage.
2. Lower the lid.
3. Using both hands, push the lid into the eye
mounts without using force (if too much force
is used, the hooks may jam and the panel will
warp).
Make sure that the lid is correctly seated.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 253

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3. Replace the cover and press together firmly.
Please observe the disposal instructions for
batteries.

Note
f Please dispose batteries in compliance with
any and all government regulations.

Replacing the remote-control

battery
The battery should be changed when the range of
the radio remote control becomes smaller or
when the light-emitting diode no longer flashes
when the remote control is operated.
1. Using your finger nail or a small screwdriver,
carefully lift off the cover of the key grip
(arrow).
2. Replace the battery (paying attention to the
polarity).
Replacement battery – Lithium CR 2032,
3 volts.

254 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Emergency Starting with Jumper Warning! Danger of caustic burns from escaping acid.
Cables Risk of short circuit, damage and explosion, f Do not lean over the battery.
resulting in serious personal injury or death.
If the battery is discharged, e.g. in winter or after Danger of gas explosion.
f Use only jumper cables of adequate diameter
the car has been parked for a long time, the bat- f Improper use of booster battery to start a
tery of another car can be used for starting with cross-section and fitted with completely insu-
vehicle may cause an explosion, resulting in
the help of jumper cables. lated alligator clips.
serious personal injury or death.
Make sure the voltage of both batteries is the f Follow all warnings and instructions of the
same. Both batteries must be 12 volt types. f Keep sources of ignition away from the bat-
jumper cable manufacturer.
The capacity (Ampere hours, Ah) of the booster tery, e.g. open flame, burning cigarettes or
battery must not be substantially less than that of f When connecting jumper cables, make sure sparking due to cable contact or welding work.
that they cannot get caught in any moving
the discharged battery. f A discharged battery can freeze even at 23 °F/
The discharged battery must be correctly con- parts in the engine compartment.
–5 °C.
nected to the vehicle’s electrical system. The jumper cables must be long enough so
Before connecting jumper cables, a frozen
that neither vehicles nor cables touch another.
f Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on battery must be thawed out.
Page 249. f The vehicles must not be in contact, otherwise
current might flow as soon as the positive ter-
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY UNLO- minals are connected.
CKING OF THE FRONT LUGGAGE COMPART-
MENT LID” on Page 248. f The cable clamps must not be allowed to con-
tact each other when one end of the jumper ca-
Note bles are connected to a battery.
f Do not try to start the car by pushing or tow- f Ensure that tools or conductive jewelery (rings,
ing. Damage to the catalytic converters and chains, watch straps) do not come into contact
other components of the car may result. with the positive jumper cable or the positive
battery post.
f Improper hook-up of jumper cables can ruin
the alternator.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 255

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connect jumper cables in the following 4. Start the engine.
sequence: An attempted start using jumper cables should
not last more than 15 seconds. Then allow a
Always observe the sequence below: waiting period of at least one minute.
1. Connect the positive lead (red) to the f Note
positive terminal of the discharged battery Before disconnecting the jumper cables, elec-
first, then connect it to the positive terminal of trical loads such as the heated rear window
the donor battery. and the heating fan blower should be switched
2. First connect the negative cable (black) to on (the vehicle’s lights must not be switched
the negative terminal of the donor battery, then on). This reduces voltage peaks which may oc-
connect it to a suitable grounding point on the cur when disconnecting the jumper cables.
vehicle with the discharged battery.
This grounding point must lie as far as possible With the engine running, remove both jumper
from the battery. cables in reverse order.
For example, a solid metal part or the engine
block are suitable grounding points.

If no suitable grounding points are to be found

on either vehicle, the negative cable must
carefully be connected directly to the negative
terminal of the battery.

If a suitable grounding point is to be found only

on the donor vehicle, the negative cable must
first be connected to the terminal of the
discharged battery, then to the grounding point
of the donor vehicle.
3. Run the engine of the donor car at a higher
speed.

256 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Bulb chart Lights, Replacing Bulbs
Type, rating Warning!
Halogen low beam H7, 55W Risk of short circuit.
Halogen high beam H9, 65W f Always switch off the relevant consumer when
changing bulbs.
Low beam/high beam with Bi-Xenon headlights Philips, D2S 35W
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
Additional high beam with Bi-Xenon headlights H7, 55 W The Bi-Xenon headlights are under high
Turn signal light, front Philips HY21W voltage when installed.
f Be careful during all work in the area of the Bi-
Turn signal light, side WY5W
Xenon headlights.
Fog light H8, 35W Risk of damage. Bulbs of a higher wattage
License plate light C5W can damage the lamp housing.
f Only the bulbs shown in the chart may be used.

f New bulbs must be clean and free from oil,

grease and fingerprints. Therefore, never
touch bulbs with your bare hands.
Use a cloth or soft paper while replacing bulbs.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 257

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Headlights
Caution!
Risk of damage to headlights due to exces-
sive temperatures and abrasion.
f To ensure optimum ventilation, do not cover
the gap between headlight and body
(e.g. “stone guards” or films).
f Use soapy water only to clean light lenses and
plastic headlight lenses.
In no case may chemical cleaners or other vol-
atile cleaning fluids be used.
f To prevent scratches, do not rub with a dry or
merely moist cloth, tissue or insect sponges.

Removing headlights 2. Remove rubber plug B from the unlocking

opening.
1. Unscrew plastic nut A.
Detach the side carpeting.

258 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installing
1. Insert headlight into the guide rails and push
fully into the fender.
2. Push headlight to the rear and at the same
time turn the socket wrench until it points
horizontally to the rear C.
The headlight locking device must perceptibly
and audibly engage.
3. Insert the rubber plug into the unlocking
opening and secure the carpet.
Check the function of all lights.

3. Place socket wrench (tool kit) on the unlocking Low beam/high beam
spindle. Halogen/Bi-Xenon headlight
The handle of the wrench should point horizon-
tally to the rear. Opening the lid of the headlight housing
4. Turn socket wrench approx. 180° A. The 1. Unscrew the 4 screws A.
headlight is unlocked and pushed forward
2. First lift release tab B, then push both release
slightly during this process.
tabs C upwards and take off lid.
5. Turn socket wrench back until it is pointing
vertically downward B and leave in position.
6. The headlight is now unlocked and can be
pulled forward out of the fender.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 259

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Changing bulb for low beam Changing bulb for high beam 2. Turn bulb holder clockwise and remove it
Halogen headlights Halogen headlights (bayonet lock).
3. Pull both plug release tabs apart and pull plug
1. Pull off plug A. 1. Turn housing cover counter-clockwise and take
out.
it off.
2. Disengage fixing clip B.
4. Replace the defective bulb with bulb holder.
3. Replace defective bulb.
5. Insert bulb holder and turn it as far as it will go
When doing so, ensure bulb is seated properly.
to the left.
4. Reassemble in reverse order.
6. Close the housing cover.
Closing the cover of the headlight housing
1. Push on cover until it is felt to engage.
2. Fasten cover with the 4 screws.

260 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Changing bulb for low beam/high beam 2. Turn the plug counter-clockwise and pull it off. 3. Disengage both fixing clips.
Bi-Xenon headlights 4. Replace defective bulb.
When doing so, ensure bulb is seated properly.
1. Unscrew the 3 screws A on the control unit and
remove the control unit. 5. Engage both fixing clips, push on plug and turn
right as far as the stop.
6. Fit control unit and screw tight.

Closing the cover of the headlight housing

1. Push on cover until it is felt to engage.
2. Fasten cover with the 4 screws.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 261

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Changing bulb for additional high beam 2. Pull off plug. 3. Disengage fixing clip.
Bi-Xenon headlights 4. Replace defective bulb.

1. Turn housing cover counter-clockwise and take 5. Engage fixing clip, insert plug and close
it off. housing cover.

262 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Changing bulb for turn signal light 2. Turn bulb holder counter-clockwise and 3. Replace the defective bulb (bayonet lock).
Halogen/Bi-Xenon headlights remove it (bayonet lock).
4. Insert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise.
1. Turn housing cover counter-clockwise and take 5. Close the housing cover.
it off.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 263

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A - Fog light height adjustment 2. Lower headlight slightly and lift it forward 3. Turn bulb holder counter-clockwise and
B - Fastening screws and out. remove it.
4. Pull both plug release tabs apart and pull
Changing bulb for fog lights plug out.
1. Unscrew both screws B. 5. Replace the defective bulb with bulb holder.
6. Insert bulb holder and turn it as far as it will go
to the right.

264 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 7. Fit headlight housing from underneath at an Changing bulb for side marker light 3. Remove side marker and undo bulb holder
angle and then swivel it upward. (bayonet lock).
1. Remove the cap in the wheel housing liner with
8. Screw in both screws. 4. Remove the bulb from the holder and replace
a screwdriver.
it. Insert holder.
9. Check operation of the headlight.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the opening in the Check operation of the light.
wheel housing liner parallel to the side marker
5. Insert the side marker’s retaining lugs A into
housing (in direction of travel).
the side section at the front.
By pressing with the screwdriver, disengage
Push in side marker until the securing spring B
the securing spring of the side marker
is felt to engage.
housing.
6. Press the cap into the wheel housing liner.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 265

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Changing Light-Emitting Diodes
and Long-Life Bulbs
The following lights are equipped with light-
emitting diodes (LEDs) or long-life bulbs and
cannot be replaced individually. Replacement also
involves a greater amount of installation work.
– Side light, front,
– Daytime driving lights on vehicles with
Bi-Xenon headlights,
– Tail lights and
– Additional brake lights
f Have the defective light replaced at an autho-
rized Porsche dealer.

Number Plate Light

Changing bulb
1. Unscrew both screws A and take off the light
lens.
2. Remove defective bulb from between the
contact springs and replace.
3. Reassemble in reverse order.
Check operation of the light.

266 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Adjusting Headlights For checking the headlight adjustment, the verti- Lateral adjustment of the headlights should be
cal position of the cutoff of the lowbeam (see fig.) carried out at a specialist workshop with an optical
f Please see the chapter “LIGHTS, REPLACING has to be projected on a vertical screen (wall) in adjustment unit.
BULBS” on Page 257. distance of 24.6 ft. (7.5 m) from the front lens of
the headlamp. Distance
Adjustment The correct position of the cutoff is 2.0 in. (5 cm) Visual aim shall be performed at not less than
The adjustment is made with the vehicle ready to at 24.6 ft. or 7.5 m (0.4°) below a horizontal line, 24.6 ft./7.5 m (this value is a rounded down con-
drive and the fuel tank completely filled. x cm from ground to the center of the headlamp version from the 25-foot distance typical of field
lens. aim using a screen). The 24.6 ft./7.5 m distance
The driver’s seat must be loaded by a person or a
is measured from the headlamp lens to the view-
165 lbs. (75 kg) weight and the tire pressures
ing screen.
must meet the prescribed values.
After being loaded, the car must be rolled a few
meters so that the suspension can settle.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 267

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Floor
The surface upon which the vehicle rests is flat
and approximately level.

Screen
The screen upon which headlamp beams are pro-
jected is perpendicular to the floor and the vehi-
cle’s longitudinal axis, flat, uniformly light in color,
unobstructed, and wide and high enough to ac-
commodate the vehicle beam patterns to be
aimed.
The screen should be wide enough to provide at
least 3.3 ft. (1 m) of space outboard of the vehi-
cle’s headlamp spacing.

Adjustment screws B - Headlight vertical adjustment

f Detach side carpeting in luggage compart-

Vertical adjustment (screw B)
ment.
Unscrew plastic nut A. f turn clockwise = beam moves down
Open the cover of the appropriate adjustment turn counter-clockwise = beam moves up
screw.
The setting is adjusted by turning the hexagon Note
socket screws right or left, as appropriate. f Do not alter the lateral adjustment.

268 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Towing Towing hook
Certain state statutes and local ordinances prohib- The towing hook A is contained in the tool box in
it towing with a chain, rope or even a tow bar. the luggage compartment.
In addition, damage to your vehicle may result
from improper procedures. Caution!
Consult your authorized Porsche dealer for de-
Risk of damage to the vehicle.
tails.
f Use the towing hook only for an emergency to
Vehicle towing remove the vehicle off the road. The towing
hook is to be used only to pull the vehicle onto
Flat bed towing is the preferred type of towing to the flat bed, tractor or towing aparatus if the
be used on Porsche vehicles. vehicle will roll freely. Under no circumstances
Under certain circumstances, wheel lifts may be is the vehicle to be secured using the towing
used when the vehicle will not roll. hook.
The vehicle must be towed with all four
f Never use the towing hook to tow this or any
wheels off the ground, otherwise damage to
other vehicle.
the vehicle may result.
PDK selector lever emergency release f Bear in mind the limited ground clearance of
your car on uneven surfaces.
In the event of an electronics failure, the selector
lever must be released for towing.
1. Lift up the rubber mat in the oddments tray.
2. Insert a screwdriver in the opening and press
down until you feel it reach the limit position.
The selector lever can now be moved to
position N.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 269

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Fitting towing hook Removing towing hook
When fitting on the rear of the vehicle, the license 1. Unscrew the towing hook A.
plate must be removed.
2. Insert plastic cover at the lower edge of the
1. Press the lower edge of the appropriate opening.
plastic cover into the bumper until the cover
3. Fold the cover up and press on its upper edge
disengages.
to engage it in the bumper.
2. Pull cover out of the bumper and let it hang by
When removing on the rear of the vehicle, the
its thread.
license plate must be mouted.
3. Completely screw in the towing hook A.

270 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4. Carefully feed towing straps through the open-
ing in the front wheels.
Make sure metal parts of straps do not dam-
age rim.
Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead.
Make sure brake backing plate is not dam-
aged.
5. Secure straps to front of flat bed.
6. Release tension on hoist cable, but do not dis-
connect.
Use hoist cable as a safety cable.

Pulling vehicle onto flat bed Tieing down vehicle on flat bed
1. Position wooden ramps at the base of the flat 1. Carefully feed towing straps through the open-
bed to reduce the angle of the pull. ing in the rear wheels.
Make sure metal parts of straps do not dam-
2. Reel in the hoist cable and check the underside
age rim.
of the vehicle for any interference.
Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead.
Make sure brake backing plate is not dam-
aged.
2. Secure straps to rear of flat bed.
3. Reel in hoist cable only far enough to tension
tie-down straps.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 271

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 272 Practical Tips, Emergency Service

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data
Vehicle Identification .................................. 274
Technical Data .......................................... 276
Tire Pressure for Cold Tires ....................... 277
Tires, Rims, Tracks .................................. 278
Driving Performance* ............................... 280
Capacities ................................................ 281
Weights ................................................... 282
Dimensions .............................................. 282
Diagrams ................................................. 283

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 273

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Vehicle Identification
When ordering spare parts or making inquiries,
please always quote the vehicle identification
number.

Vehicle data bank

The vehicle data bank is attached to the inside of
the “Maintenance” booklet.
It contains all important data about your vehicle.

Note
This data bank cannot be re-ordered if it is lost or
damaged.
This label contains the following information:
1. Vehicle Identification No.
Vehicle identification number Safety compliance sticker
2. Type/Type description
In accordance with Federal Safety Regulations, The safety compliance sticker is your assurance
3. Engine code/Transmission code the vehicle identification number of your car is lo- that your new Porsche complies with all applicable
4. Paint No./Interior cated at the bottom left of the windshield frame Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards which
and can be seen from the outside. were in effect at the time the vehicle was manufac-
5. Optional equipment tured.
The vehicle identification number is in the luggage
compartment under the battery cover and at the f The sticker also shows the month and year of
bottom left behind the windshield. production and the vehicle identification
number of your car (perforations) as well as
Removing the battery cover the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and the Gross
f Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on Axle Weight Rating.
Page 249.

274 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire pressure plate Engine number
The tire pressure plate is attached to the left-hand The engine number is stamped on the underside
door aperture. of the crankcase.

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 275

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Technical Data
Engine data

Boxster Boxster S
Type MA 120 MA 121
Horizontally opposed engine, liquid cooled Horizontally opposed engine, liquid cooled
Number of cylinders 6 6
Bore 3.5 in./89 mm 3.8 in./97 mm
Stroke 3.1 in./77.5 mm 3.1 in./77.5 mm
Cubic capacity 176.5 cu. in./2893 cm3 209.7 cu. in./3436 cm3
Net-horsepower 255 hp/188 kW 310 hp/228 kW
at crankshaft speed 6400 rpm 6400 rpm
Net torque 214 ft. lb./290 Nm 266 ft. lb./360 Nm
at crankshaft speed 4400 - 6000 rpm 4400 - 5500 rpm
Engine oil consumption up to 1.6 quarts/622 miles (1.5 liters/1000 km) up to 1.6 quarts/622 miles (1.5 liters/1000 km)

276 Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tire Pressure for Cold Tires (68 °F/20 °C)
Summer and snow tires

17 inch wheels front 30 psi (2.0 bar)

rear 31 psi (2.1 bar)

18 inch wheels front 30 psi (2.0 bar)

rear 31 psi (2.1 bar)

19 inch wheels front 32 psi (2.2 bar)

rear 34 psi (2.3 bar)

f These tire pressures apply only to the tire makes and types approved by Porsche.
Please see the chapter “WHEEL BOLTS” on Page 236.
f Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING” on Page 147.

Technical Data 277

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tires, Rims, Tracks
Boxster Tires Rim Rim offset Track

Summer tires front 205/55 ZR 17 91Y 7 J x 17 H2 55 mm 58.7 in./1490 mm

rear 235/50 ZR 17 96Y 8.5 J x 17 H2 40 mm 60.4 in./1534 mm

or front 235/40 ZR 18 91Y 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm

rear 265/40 ZR 18 101Y XL 9 J x 18 H2 43 mm 60.2 in./1528 mm

or front 235/35 ZR 19 87Y 8 J x 19 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm

rear 265/35 ZR 19 94Y 9.5 J x 19 H2 46 mm 59.9 in./1522 mm

or front 235/35 ZR 19 87Y 8.5 J x 19 H2 55 mm 58.7 in./1490 mm

rear 265/35 ZR 19 94Y 10 J x 19 H2 42 mm 60.2 in./1530 mm

Snow tires front 205/55 R 17 91V M+S 7 J x 17 H2 55 mm 58.7 in./1490 mm

rear * 235/50 R 17 96V M+S 8.5 J x 17 H2 40 mm 60.4 in./1534 mm

or front 235/40 R 18 91V M+S 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm

rear * 255/40 R 18 95V M+S 9 J x 18 H2 43 mm 60.2 in./1528 mm

The load capacity coefficient (e.g. ”91“) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. ”V“) are minimum requirements.

278 Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Boxster S Tires Rim Rim offset Track

Summer tires front 235/40 ZR 18 91Y 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm

rear 265/40 ZR 18 101Y XL 9 J x 18 H2 43 mm 60.2 in./1528 mm

or front 235/35 ZR 19 87Y 8 J x 19 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm

rear 265/35 ZR 19 94Y 9.5 J x 19 H2 46 mm 59.9 in./1522 mm

or front 235/35 ZR 19 87Y 8.5 J x 19 H2 55 mm 58.7 in./1490 mm

rear 265/35 ZR 19 94Y 10 J x 19 H2 42 mm 60.2 in./1530 mm

Snow tires front 235/40 R 18 91V M+S 8 J x 18 H2 57 mm 58.5 in./1486 mm

rear * 255/40 R 18 95V M+S 9 J x 18 H2 43 mm 60.2 in./1528 mm

The load capacity coefficient (e.g. ”91“) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. ”Y“) are minimum requirements.

f When changing tires or fitting new ones: Please see the chapter “WHEEL BOLTS” on Page 236.

Danger!
Installation of sizes not authorized by
Porsche may have a dangerous effect on
the driving stability and could result in
serious personal injury or death.
f Before mounting new tires, check with your
Porsche dealer about the current release status.

Tire and rim sizes Extensive tests are performed before specific tires and wheels are approved by Porsche. Your Porsche dealer has information
about approved tires and wheels and is happy to assist you. If aftermarket tires and/or wheels are installed which are not
approved by Porsche, the vehicle’s roadability and handling characteristics might be impaired. Since Porsche has no data on
such combinations, Porsche cannot stand behind the safety or durability of these aftermarket combinations.

Snow chains Can be mounted only on the rear wheels; maximum speed 30 mph/50 km/h. Use only Porsche authorized fine-link
cross-type or edge chains. Snow chain clearance can be guaranteed only with the tire + rim combination marked*
without spacers. Please see the chapter “SPACERS” on Page 243.

Technical Data 279

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Driving Performance*
Boxster Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung

Top track speed

6-speed transmission 164 mph/263 km/h 162 mph/261 km/h

Acceleration 0 – 60 mph 5.6 seconds 5.5 seconds

Acceleration 0 – 60 mph with Sport+ 5.3 seconds
Acceleration 0 – 100 km/h (62 mph) 5.9 seconds 5.8 seconds
Acceleration 0 – 100 km/h (62 mph) with Sport+ 5.6 seconds

Boxster S Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung

Top track speed 170 mph/274 km/h 169 mph/272 km/h

Acceleration 0 – 60 mph 5.0 seconds 4.9 seconds
Acceleration 0 – 60 mph with Sport+ 4.7 seconds
Acceleration 0 – 100 km/h (62 mph) 5.3 seconds 5.2 seconds
Acceleration 0 – 100 km/h (62 mph) with Sport+ 5.0 seconds
* At DIN empty weight and half load, without performance-inhibiting extra equipment.

280 Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Capacities
Use only fluids and fuels authorized by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche dealer will gladly advise you.
Your Porsche has been designed so that it is not necessary to mix any additives with oils or fuels.
Engine Oil change quantity with oil filter approx. 1.98 U.S.gallons/7.5 liters
Please see the chapter “ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION” on Page 200.

Coolant Boxster: approx. 6.05 - 6.18 U.S. gallons/22.9 - 23.4 liters

Boxster S : approx. 6.13 - 6.61 U.S. gallons/23.3 - 25 liters

Manual transmission and differential Boxster: approx. 0.79 U.S. gallons/3 liters
Boxster S: approx. 0.85 U.S. gallons/3.2 liters

Porsche Doppelkupplung approx. 0.78 U.S. gallons/2.95 liters

Gear set

Porsche Doppelkupplung approx. 1.37 U.S. gallons/5.2 liters

Clutch/Hydraulic fluid

Power steering approx. 1.1 quarts/1 liter hydraulic fluid Pentosin CHF 11 S® or CHF 202 S®

Brake fluid approx. 0.4 quarts/0.39 liters; use only Original Porsche brake fluid

Windshield washer approx. 0.66 U.S. gallons/2.5 liters without headlight washer
approx. 1.58 U.S. gallons/6 liters with headlight washer

Fuel tank Refill volume approx. 16.9 U.S. gallons/64 liters, including approx. 2.6 U.S.gallons/10 liters reserve.

Fuel quality Your engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel economy using unleaded premium fuel with
an octane rating of 98 RON (93 CLC or AKI).
Porsche therefore recommends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not always be available. Be assured that your vehicle will operate
properly on unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of at least 95 RON (90 CLC or AKI), since the engine’s
”Electronic Octane™ knock control“ will adapt the ignition timing, if necessary.

Technical Data 281

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Weights
Boxster Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung

Empty weight (depending on equipment) 2943 lbs. to 3153 lbs. 3009 lbs. to 3230 lbs.
1335 kg to 1430 kg 1365 kg to 1465 kg
Maximum gross weight 3605 lbs./1635 kg 3682 lbs./1670 kg
Maximum axle load, front* 1731 lbs./785 kg 1731 lbs./785 kg
Maximum axle load, rear* 2017 lbs./915 kg 2017 lbs./915 kg

Boxster S Manual transmission Porsche Doppelkupplung

Empty weight (depending on equipment) 2987 lbs. to 3175 lbs. 3042 lbs. to 3241 lbs.
1355 kg to 1440 kg 1380 kg to 1470 kg
Maximum gross weight 3627 lbs./1645 kg 3693 lbs./1675 kg
Maximum axle load, front* 1731 lbs./785 kg 1731 lbs./785 kg
Maximum axle load, rear* 2072 lbs./940 kg 2072 lbs./940 kg

*The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.

Note: If additional accessories are installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.

Dimensions
Boxster Boxster S

Length 172.1 in./4372 mm 172.1 in./4372 mm

Width 70.9 in./1801 mm 70.9 in./1801 mm
Width with door mirrors 76.9 in./1952 mm 76.9 in./1952 mm
Height 50.9 in./1292 mm, with PASM 50.5 in./1282 mm 50.9 in./1294 mm, with PASM 50.6 in./1284 mm
Wheelbase 95.1 in./2415 mm 95.1 in./2415 mm
Ground clearance 4.4 in./112 mm, with PASM 4.1 in./105 mm 4.3 in./109 mm, with PASM 4.0 in./101 mm
Turning circle 36.4 ft./11.1 m 36.4 ft./11.1 m

282 Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Diagrams
Engine diagram at full power, Boxster

Technical Data 283

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engine diagram at full power, Boxster S

284 Technical Data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 A Anti-glare mirrors ..................................30 Break in............................................... 10
ABS (antilock brake system) .......................... 59 Car washes ........................................214 Pads ................................................... 58
Warning light ........................................ 60 Door locking ...................................18, 24 Pedal................................................... 57
Adaptive sports seat ..................................... 33 Garage door .........................................76 Wear ................................................... 58
Adjusting Headlights.................................... 267 Headlight adjustment.............................79 Brake fluid
Advanced Airbag........................................... 45 Speed control .........................84, 85, 120 Changing ........................................... 203
Air conditioning........................................... 106 Transmission ......................................174 Checking level.................................... 202
Air conditioning compressor ................ 109, 111 Automatic speed control..............................120 Level ................................................. 202
Air conditioning system ............................... 109 Indicator light......................................120 Warning light...................................... 203
Air distribution ............................ 106, 109, 111 Average consumption..........................131, 161 Brake light ................................................. 266
Air filter...................................................... 211 Average speed ...................................131, 161 Brake light, additional ................................. 266
Air intake.................................................... 112 Brakes ...................................................... 202
Airbag.......................................................... 44 B Brake circuit division warning light ....... 203
Cleaning covers .................................. 219 Backrest Brake warning light............................. 128
Function ............................................... 45 Adjustment ...........................................32 Fluid .......................................... 202, 281
Warning light ........................................ 48 Release ................................................32 Fluid warning light............................... 203
Air-conditioning compressor ........................ 108 Battery.......................................................249 Function .............................................. 56
Alarm system .........................................25, 99 Care...................................................250 New brake pads or linings..................... 58
Deactivating passenger compartment Charge state.......................................249 Pads ................................................... 10
monitoring............................................ 26 Charging ............................................250 Parking brake....................................... 55
Fault indication...................................... 26 Putting vehicle into operation ...............251 Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake
Function indication ................................ 25 Remote control ...................................254 (PCCB) .................................................. 4
Not active .......................................... 246 Removing ...........................................252 Test stand ........................................... 65
Alcantara, cleaning ..................................... 219 Replacing ...........................................251 Break in brakes............................................ 10
Antenna ....................................... 99, 100, 214 Warning light.......................................128 Break in hints............................................... 10
Antifreeze .................................................. 197 Winter operation..................................251 Bulbs
Antilock brake system (ABS) .......................... 59 Before driving off ........................................8, 9 Chart................................................. 257
Warning light ........................................ 60 Belts ............................................................42 Replacing .......................................... 257
Ashtray ........................................................ 87 Cleaning .............................................219
Assembly aids for wheel changes................. 237 Tensioner .............................................42
Audio operation ...................................... 97, 98 Warning light.........................................43
Auto-button, air conditioning ........................ 109 Blower adjustment ..............................106, 112
Automatic Blower speed adjustment ............................110
Air conditioning system ....................... 109 Brake

Index 285

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 C Communication management.........................97 Mirror heating .......................................31
Cabriolet .................................................... 182 Compact disc Mirrors .................................................29
Capacities, overview ................................... 281 Player ..................................................98 Windows.........................18, 27, 182, 216
Car care .................................................... 213 Storage................................................90 Drive-Off Assistant.......................................173
Car telephone............................................... 99 Compartment monitoring...............................25 Driving
Car washes ................................................ 214 Convertible top ...........................................182 Hints ......................................................8
Carpet ....................................................... 219 Care ..................................................215 Winter ................................................179
Catalytic converters .................................... 209 Coolant ......................................124, 197, 281 Driving off
Cautions ............................................ 196, 222 Checking ............................................197 Drive-Off Assistant ...............................173
Central locking ........................................... 246 Level..................................................197 Launch Control....................................177
Emergency operation ...................... 19, 22 Temperature gage ..............................124 Driving performance....................................280
In cars with alarm system ...................... 21 Topping off.........................................197 Drop-center rim...........................................233
In cars without alarm system ................. 19 Warning light.......................................124
Overload protection ............................ 246 Cooling system...................................124, 197 E
Central vents .............................................. 112 Warning light.......................................124 Electrical system.........................................245
Central warning light ................................... 128 Cornering light..............................................78 Emergency flasher switch ..............................77
Changing light-emitting diodes (LEDs) ........... 266 Indicator light......................................123
Emergency operation ....................................22
Changing wheels ........................................ 237 Crankcase ventilation ..................................209 Central locking ................................19, 22
Check engine Cruise control.................................84, 85, 128 Convertible top ...................................185
Warning light ...................................... 128 Cupholder ....................................................86
Ignition key ...........................................74
Check engine warning light .......................... 129 Lids....................................................248
Opening the oil filler cap ...................... 200 D Tank flap ............................................205
Checking pressure...................................... 238 Data bank...................................................274 Emergency service .....................................222
Child restraint systems.................................. 50 Daytime driving lights ....................................78 Emergency starting with jumper cables.255, 256
Chime .................................................... 78, 80 Changing bulbs ...................................266 Emission control system..............129, 208, 209
CHRONO Stopwatch.................................... 140 On-board computer .............................160 Engine
Cigarette lighter............................................ 88 Defrosting windows.......................31, 106, 110 Checking the oil level ...........................157
Circulating-air button ........................... 106, 110 Diagnostic socket .........................................11 Diagram .............................................283
Clock ................................................. 127, 160 Dimensions ................................................282 Exhaust ..................................................5
Clutch .................................................. 60, 172 Direction indicator light, front.......................266 Number ..............................................275
Clutch pedal ................................................. 60 Door ............................................................18 Oil consumption ............................10, 199
Combination filter ....................................... 211 Handles................................................18 Oil level ..............................................199
Comfort seat ................................................ 33 Locks...........................................18, 215 Oil level indicator.................................157
Coming home mode................................ 79, 80 Mirror...................................................30 Oils ............................................199, 281

286 Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Speeds ................................................ 10 Footwell lights...............................................69 Beam adjustment ................................. 79
Starting................................................ 75 Fresh air intake ...........................................112 Changing bulbs .......................... 259, 261
Stopping .............................................. 76 Front lid .................................................92, 93 Cleaning system................... 82, 210, 281
Engine compartment Fuel ...................................................126, 205 Flasher ................................................ 81
Blower ......................................... 76, 124 Containers......................................4, 207 Removing .......................................... 258
Blower fan .......................................... 124 Economy ............................................204 Heated rear window ..................... 31, 193, 194
Care .................................................. 216 Evaporation control .............................207 Heated rear window/Door mirror heating ..... 113
Lid ....................................................... 93 Fuels containing ethanol.......................207 Heater....................................................... 109
Lid warning light.................................... 92 Level gage .........................................126 Heating ..................................................... 106
Engine oil Level warning light ..............................126 High beam
Change .............................................. 201 Recommendation ........................206, 207 Indicator light ..................................... 123
Consumption ........................................ 10 Recommendations ..............................206 Lever............................................. 78, 80
Performance class .............................. 201 Tank ..................................................206 High beam, additional
Recommendation ................................ 200 Function keys ...............................................40 Changing bulb .................................... 261
Topping off.........................................200 Fuses, replacing .........................................247 High-pressure cleaning units........................ 213
Viscosity ............................................ 201 Home mode........................................... 79, 80
Exhaust G HomeLink .................................................. 102
Pipes ..................................................... 5 Garage Hoods ............................................. 92, 93, 95
System ................................................ 55 Door ....................................................76 Horn ..................................................... 12, 21
Tailpipes, stainless steel...................... 217 Hot exhaust pipes .......................................... 5
Door opener .......................................102
External antenna .........................................100 Lift .....................................................242
Gear display .......................................116, 118 I
F Gear shift indicator......................................123 Ignition key .................................................. 72
Filler flap .................................................... 205 Glove compartment.......................................90 Emergency operation ........................... 74
Fire extinguisher .........................................101 Gong..................................14, 73, 78, 80, 133 Ignition lock ................................................. 72
Flat tire ...................................................... 239 Ground clearance............................................4 Withdrawing ignition key,
Floor mats.................................................. 219 PDK transmission ............................... 176
Fluids......................................................... 211 H Immobilizer.................................................. 15
FM reception ................................................ 97 Handbrake....................................................55 Indicator lights ................................... 116, 118
Fog light ...................................................... 80 INFO Warning messages ............................. 136
Hardtop......................................................190
Fog light, rear.........................................78, 80 Head restraints .............................................32 Instrument
Fog lights Headlights ..................................................258 Illumination......................................... 120
Changing bulb..................................... 264 Lights............................................ 78, 80
Adjusting ....................................267, 268
Footbrake .................................................... 56 Panel................................. 116, 118, 162

Index 287

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Interior......................................................... 69 Loading information ....................................234 O
Interior lights ................................................ 69 Locking..................................................20, 23 Octane rating......................................206, 207
Interior mirror............................................... 30 Low beam ....................................................81 Odometer...................................................121
Luggage Off delay ................................................79, 80
J Net ......................................................91 Oil......................................................199, 281
Jumper cables............................................ 255 Luggage compartment ..................................94 Change...............................................201
Lid .......................................................92 Checking level.....................................157
Lid warning light....................................92 Consumption.........................................10
K Unlocking lid .........................................16 Level checks.......................................199
Key codes.................................................... 15 Luggage compartment/ Level indicator ....................................157
Keys ...................................................... 15, 16 engine compartment lid, warning lights...........92 Recommendation ................................200
Topping off engine oil ..........................200
L M OIL Display and measurement
LATCH System ............................................. 54 Maintenance ...............................................196 of the engine oil level...................................157
Launch Control ........................................... 177 Make-up mirror .............................................41 On-board computer .....................................130
Leather care .............................................. 218 Maximum permitted engine speeds ................10 Basic settings .............................131, 159
License plate light................................... 78, 80 Manual transmission............................172 Calling on-board computer functions .....131
Lids ....................................................... 93, 95 Mirror Functions and display possibilities ........131
Emergency unlocking .......................... 248 Folding in..............................................30 General information .............................160
Lifting vehicle ............................................. 242 Heating ........................................31, 113 Language versions ..............................159
Light Inside ...................................................29 Operation, controls..............................130
Daytime driving..................................... 78 Mirrors...................................................29, 71 Selecting a radio station ......................146
Flasher............................. 78, 80, 81, 123 Anti-glare ..............................................30 Setting the clock .................................160
Low beam ................................ 78, 80, 81 Multi-functional steering wheel........................40 Switching daytime driving lights on/off ..160
Sensor for instrument illumination 116, 118 Switching on navigation .......................146
Switch...................................... 78, 80, 81 Tire pressure warnings ........................152
Light alloy wheels
N Warnings and messages ......................162
Navigation ....................................................97
Inscription .......................................... 233 On-board literature ..........................................2
Selection field, on-board computer .......146
Light functions, individual............................... 81 Operating voice control ...............................130
Notes on
Lights .......................................................... 69 Operating your Porsche in other Countries ....204
Car care.............................................213
Care .................................................. 218 Orientation light ............................................69
Maintenance .......................................196
Headlight beam adjustment ................... 79 Outside temperatur indicator........................127
Number plate light ..................................78, 80
LIMIT Acoustic warning signal for speed limit 133 Oxygen sensor............................................209
Changing bulb.....................................266
Load switch-off ........................................... 246

288 Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 P Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB) .......4 Recirculating-air button ............................... 110
Paint Porsche Communication Management (PCM)...97 Refuelling .................................................. 206
Care .......................................... 213, 215 Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ....................174 Relays ....................................................... 245
Data................................................... 275 Drive-Off Assistant...............................173 Remote control ............................................ 16
ParkAssistant ............................................... 70 Driving in winter ..................................179 Readiness............................................ 17
Parking Faults.................................................175 Replacing battery ............................... 254
PDK transmission................................ 179 Kickdown............................................178 Standby funktion .................................. 17
Parking aids ........................................... 70, 71 Launch Control....................................174 Synchronization.................................... 17
Parking brake ............................................... 55 Manual selection mode ........................178 Replacement key.......................................... 15
Warning light ........................................ 56 Reduced driving program.....................180 Replacing bulbs.......................................... 257
Parking light ..................................... 78, 80, 81 Selector lever emergency release ........269 Replacing wiper blades ............................... 212
Particle filter............................................... 211 Selector lever position.................174, 176 Retractable spoiler ....................................... 67
Passenger compartment monitoring............... 25 Shifting gears on the steering wheel .....177 Rims
PDK transmission ....................................... 174 Sport mode ........................................176 Diameter ........................................... 233
Drive-Off Assistant............................... 173 Transmission fluid ...............................211 Rim width........................................... 233
Driving in winter .................................. 179 Porsche Stability Management (PSM)..............63 TPM sensors...................................... 229
Faults................................................. 175 Information light ....................................65 Running in.................................................... 10
Kickdown ........................................... 177 Power steering fluid level.....................211, 281
Launch Control ................................... 177 Power windows.....................................18, 182 S
Manual selection mode ........................ 178 Practical tips ..............................................222 Safety belts ................................................. 42
Reduced driving program ....................180 Putting vehicle into operation .......................251 Cleaning ............................................ 219
Selector lever emergency release ........ 269 Tensioner ............................................ 42
Selector lever positions ....................... 176 R Warning light........................................ 43
Shifting gears on the steering wheel ..... 177 Radiator fan..........................................76, 198 Safety compliance sticker........................... 274
Sport mode ........................................ 176 Radio reception ............................................97 Sealing set ................................................ 240
Transmission fluid ............................... 211 Rain sensor ..................................................82 Seals ........................................................ 218
Warning messages.............................. 180 Range on remaining fuel ......................131, 160 Care.................................................. 218
Pen holder.................................................... 90 Rear fender Seat
Plastic parts ............................................... 218 Retractable...........................................67 Adaptive sports seat............................. 33
Care .................................................. 218 Rear lid ............................................92, 93, 95 Adjustment .......................................... 32
Platform lift ................................................ 242 Rear spoiler............................................67, 68 Comfort seat ....................................... 33
Porsche Active Suspension Management Rear view mirrors....................................29, 30 Heating................................................ 37
(PASM)......................................................... 66 Rear window defogger...........................31, 113 Memory ............................................... 35
Sport mode .......................................... 66 Rear window heating ...................................113 Position ............................................... 32

Index 289

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sports bucket seat ............................... 34 Fixed....................................................68 Suspension management...............................66
Sports seat .......................................... 33 Retractable...........................................67
Standard seat....................................... 33 Sport Chrono Plus package T
Ventilation ............................................ 38 CHRONO stopwatch ............................140 Tachometer ................................................123
Seat memory Sport mode ..........................................61 Tail light .....................................................266
Operating with the remote control .......... 36 Sport mode ..................................................65 Tank ..................................................205, 206
Operation with person buttons ............... 35 PDK transmission................................176 Ventilation system ...............................207
Selector lever position ........................ 116, 118 Switching on/off....................................61 Technical data ............................................276
Selector lever position indicator, Switching PASM on/off ..........................66 TEL Telephone information...........................137
PDK transmission ....................................... 175 Sport plus mode ...........................................61 Telephone ....................................................99
Service ...................................................... 137 Sports bucket seat .......................................34 Temperature setting....................106, 109, 110
SET Basic setting on on-board computer ...... 159 Sports exhaust system..................................55 Temperature, outside indicator.....................127
Shift indicator ............................................. 123 Sports seat ..................................................33
Test stand, measurements ............................65
Shifting gears Stability management system ........................63
Theft protection ............................................14
Drive-Off Assistant............................... 173 Standard seat...............................................33
Tire
Manual transmission............................ 172 Starter switch ...............................................72
Care...................................................227
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ............ 174 Starting........................................................73
Damage .............................................227
Side light, front........................................... 266 Starting engine .............................................75
Designations .......................................231
Side marker light .................................... 78, 80 Steering column
Pressure plate ....................................225
Changing bulb..................................... 265 Locking ................................................73
Replacements .....................................228
Side vents .................................................. 112 Steering lock ................................................72
Traction..............................................226
Snow chains............................... 231, 277, 279 Steering wheel
Wear ..................................................226
Snow tires.......................................... 230, 278 Adjustment ...........................................38
Tire pressure monitoring
Socket....................................................... 245 Function keys........................................40
Warning light.......................................155
Spacers ..................................................... 243 Heating ................................................39
Wheels ...............................................229
Spare key .................................................... 15 Lock ....................................................73
Tire pressure monitoring (TPM) ....................147
Spare wheel ............................................... 277 Multi functional......................................40
Tires ....................................10, 223, 278, 279
Speed code letter ....................................... 232 PDK shift buttons ................................174
Care...................................................223
Speed control....................................... 85, 106 Stopping engine............................................76
Checking pressure ..............................238
Automatic............................................. 84 Stopwatch..................................................140
Inscription...........................................232
Indicator light...................................... 120 Storage options ............................................89
Loading information.............................234
Speed limit......................................... 133, 232 Storage possibilities......................................89
New tires..............................................10
Speedometer ............................................. 122 Storing your Porsche ..................................220
Pressure.....................................224, 280
Spoiler......................................................... 67 Sun visors ....................................................41
Pressure monitoring ............................147

290 Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Pressure plate .................................... 275 U W
Removing and storing.......................... 229 Undercoating......................................208, 217 Warning lights and messages...................... 162
Sealant ...................................... 239, 240 Washer
Sidewall .............................................232 Fluid .................................................. 210
Size ................................................... 232
V
Valves ........................................................228 Fluid warning light............................... 210
Snow tires .......................................... 230 Washer fluid............................................... 281
Vanity mirror.................................................41
Tools ........................................................... 94 Washer lever................................................ 82
Vehicle
Towing............................................... 269, 271 Washing .................................................... 214
Care...................................................213
Towing hook............................................... 269 Weights ..................................................... 282
Engine number....................................275
TPM Tire pressure monitoring...................... 147 Welcome Home Function ........................ 79, 80
Identification .......................................274
Track......................................................... 278 Wheel.................................. 10, 223, 278, 279
Identification label ...............................274
Transmission Alignment .......................................... 229
Identification number ...........................274
Drive-Off Assistant............................... 172 Balancing........................................... 229
Lifting.................................................242
Fluid........................................... 211, 281 Bolts ................................................. 236
Load capacity .....................................235
Manual transmission............................ 172 Care.................................................. 223
Putting into operation ..........................251
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) .... 172, 174 Changing ........................................... 239
Safety compliance sticker....................274
Trip Odometer ............................................ 121 Checking pressure ............................. 238
Washing .............................................214
Trunk entrapment ......................................... 95 Inscription.......................................... 232
Vehicle identification number........................274
Turn signal Loading information............................ 234
Ventilation ..................................................109
Indicator light...................................... 123 Securing bolts.................................... 236
Vents .........................................106, 109, 112
Turn signal light, front Security wheel bolts ............................. 15
Viscosity, engine oil.....................................201
Changing bulb..................................... 263 Sidewall............................................. 232
Voice control, button ...................................130
Turn signals ......................................... 81, 123 Size .................................................. 232
Voice control, PCM .....................................130
Tire pressure ..................................... 224
Tire pressure plate ............................. 275
Tire sealant................................ 239, 240
Wheels
Assembly aids for wheel changes ........ 237
Care.................................................. 218
TPM sensors...................................... 229
Windows............................................ 182, 216
Anti-crushing protection ........................ 28
Care.................................................. 216
Opening/Closing .................................. 27

Index 291

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Washer nozzles .................................... 82
Washer system ........................... 210, 281
Windshield
Wiper blades, changing ....................... 212
Windshield wipers ................................. 82, 212
Replacing ........................................... 212
Windstop.................................................... 189
Winter operation
Battery............................................... 251
Coolant .............................................. 197
Engine oil ........................................... 198
Jumper cables ............................ 255, 256
Locks ................................................ 215
Seals ................................................. 218
Snow chains ....................................... 231
Tires .................................................. 230
Washer fluid ....................................... 210
Wiper blades ...................................... 212
Wiper
Blades ............................................... 212
Wiper blades
Care .................................................. 217
Changing............................................ 212

292 Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine